TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 4 Awake

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material 4th Lesson Awake Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material 4th Lesson Awake

Annotations (Section A, Q.No. 2, Marks: 4)
Annotate the following in about 100 words each.

a) Who kneel in thy presence to serve and adore thee!

Introduction: This beautiful line is taken from the patriotic lyric”Awake” written by Sarojini Naidu. She is fondly remembered as the Nightingale of India. This is the last poem in the part of “The Broken wing: Songs of Love”.

Context and meaning: This poem is a fervent appeal for unity and action. That call is at once artistic and rhetoric. First, the nation is personified as our mother. All Indians become her children. The poet visualizes all children praying to he mother. They, entreat her to give them a chance to serve her and admire her glory. This kind of visualization is a powerful way to persuade everyone to tread that path.

Critical Comment: The poem expresses strong nationalistic feelings. It was written more than a century ago. Yet, it is very relevant today.

కవి పరిచయం : ఈ అందమైన వాక్యం సరోజినీ నాయుడు వ్రాసిన దేశభక్తి గీతం “మేల్కొను” నుండి తీసుకోబడింది. ఆమెను భారతదేశపు గానకోకిలగా ప్రేమగా గుర్తుంచుకుంటారు. “The Broken Wing: Songs of Love” లో ఇది చివరి కవిత.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : పద్య౦ ఐక్యత మరియు కార్యాచరణ కోసం తీవ్రమైన విజ్ఞప్తి. ఆ పిలుపు ఒకేసారి కళాత్మకంగా మరియు వాక్చాతుర్యంగా ఉంటుంది. మొదటగా, దేశం మన తల్లిగా వ్యక్తీకరించబడింది. భారతీయులందరూ ఆమె బిడ్డలయ్యారు. పిల్లలందరూ తల్లిని ప్రార్థిస్తున్నట్లు కవి దృశ్యమానం చేస్తుంది. ఆమెకు సేవ చేయడానికి మరియు ఆమె కీర్తిని మెచ్చుకునే అవకాశం ఇవ్వాలని వారు ఆమెను వేడుకుంటారు. ఈ రకమైన దృశ్యమానం ప్రతి ఒక్కరినీ ఆ మార్గంలో నడపడానికి ఒప్పించే శక్తివంతమైన మార్గం.

విమర్శ : బలమైన జాతీయ భావాలను తెలియజేస్తుంది ఈ పద్య౦. శతాబ్దపు కాలానికి ముందే ఇది వ్రాయబడింది. అయినప్పటికీ, ప్రస్తుతానికి చాలా సంబంధం కల్గి ఉంది. అది నేటికీ చాలా సందర్భోచితమైనది.

b) Awaken and sever the woes that enthral us (Revision Test – IV)

Introduction: This patriotic line is taken from the patriotic lyric, ” Awake” Written by Sarojini Naidu, the nightingale of India. This is the last poem of “The broken wings: Songs of Love”.

Context and meaning: It is a soul stirring plea for action and zenity. The woes of bondage are to be cut. Mother India should gain its glory gain and grow and glow. Hence, the children implore the mother to rouse them from their slumber and to cut off the ties of bondage in which they are bound at present their hands are to be purified by her so that they might be prompted to undertake more and more deed of victory and triumph.

Critical Comment: The poem expresses strong nationalistic feelings. It was written more than a century ago. Yet, it is very relevant today.

కవి పరిచయం : ఈ దేశభక్తిని తెలియజేయు వాక్యం దేశభక్తి గేయం. భారత గానకోకిల సరోజినీ నాయుడు వ్రాసిన “మేల్కొను” నుండి తీసుకోబడింది. “ది బ్రోకెన్ వింగ్: సాంగ్స్ ఆఫ్ లవ్” లో ఇది చివరి కావ్యం. ఈ పద్య౦.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : ఐక్యతను మరియు కార్యాచరణను ఇది మనస్సును కదిలించే కావ్యం. బానిస బాధలు తుంచివేయాలి. భరతమాత మరల తన కీర్తిని, ఎదుగుదలను మరియు కాంతి, వెలుగు పొందాలి. కాబట్టి భరతమాత బిడ్డలు, ప్రస్తుతం వారు బందీలై ఉన్న బానిస సంకెళ్ళను తుంచివేయుటకు ఆమెను నిద్రావస్థితి నుండి మేల్కొలపమని భరతమాతను ప్రార్థించుచున్నారు. విజయోన్ముకులు అవ్వటానికి, వారి చేతులను పవిత్రం చేయమని తల్లిని కోరుకుంటున్నారు.

విమర్శ: గట్టి జాతీయభావాలను ఈ పద్య౦ తెలియజేస్తుంది. ఒక శతాబ్దపు కాలానికి క్రితమే ఈ పద్య౦ వ్రాయబడింది. అయినప్పటికీ, ఈ రోజులకు బాగా సంబంధించింది.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 4 Awake

c) Ne’er shall we fail thee, forsake thee or falter,
whose hearts are thy home and thy shield and thine altar

Introduction: These patriotic lines are taken from the patriotic lyric, “Awake”, written by Sarojini Naidu the nightingale of India. This is the last poem in the part of “The Broken wing: songs of Love”

Context and meaning: Here, the poetess says that the children of the mother land love her very much. They have a great devotion for their mother land. They are the true children they have inherited her pride, moral and spiritual strength. They want to preserve these qualities. The y will never fail to protect her. They will never desert her. Their hearts are the home of the mother. They are her shield with which they would protect her. They are her altar at which they would worship her. It is with her help that they will be set again in the forefront of glory.

Critical Comment: The poem expresses strong nationalistic feelings It was written more than a century ago. Yet it is very relevant today.

కవి పరిచయం : ఈ దేశభక్తి పంక్తులు భారత గానకోకిల సరోజినీ నాయుడుచే రచించబడిన “మేల్కొను” అను దేశభక్తి గేయం నుండి తీసుకొనబడింది. “The Broken Wing: Songs of Love” లో ఇది చివరి వాక్యం.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : ఇక్కడ, మాతృభూమి బిడ్డలు ఆమెను అమితంగా ప్రేమిస్తున్నారంటుంది కవయిత్రి. వారికి మాతృభూమిపట్ల గొప్ప భక్తి ఉంది. వారి ఆమె (భరతమాత) నిజమైన బిడ్డలు. భరతమాత గర్వం, హుందా, నీతి మరియు ఆధ్యాత్మిక బలాన్ని వారసత్వంగా వారు పొందారు. ఈ లక్షణాలను నిలుపుకోవాలనుకుంటున్నారు వారు. ఎప్పటికీ ఆమెను వదులుకోరు వారు. వారి హృదయాల్లో భరతమాత విలువైనది. వారు ఆమె రక్షణ కవచాలు ఆమెను రక్షించుకుంటారు. ఆమెను పూజించే పూజాపీఠం వారు ఆమె (ఖర్చులు) సహాయంతో వారు (భారతీయులు) ఆమెను మురళీ కీర్తి ప్రతిష్టలు ముందు నిలుపుతారు.

విమర్శ : ధృఢమైన జాతీయ భావాలను ప్రదర్శిస్తుంది ఈ పద్య౦. ఒక శతాబ్దకాలం క్రితమే వ్రాయబడింది ఈ పద్య౦. అయినప్పటికి

d) …………………. Hearken,
O queen and O goddess, we hail thee! (Revision Test – IV)

Introduction: These are the concluding lines of the patriotic lyric, “Awake” written by sarojini Naidu, the Nightingale of India. This is the last poem of “The Broken wing! Songs of Love”.

Context and meaning: Here, people of all Indian religions assure her chat they would serve her with devotion to the best of their ability. They call upon their great mother, their queen and their goddess to listen to their prayer and awake from her present slumber. Their fearless united and devoted efforts shall certainly be sufficient to free her from her present bondage.

Critical Comment: This lyric is a soul stirring call for unity and action. It expresses strong nationalistic feelings.

కవి పరిచయం : భారత గాన కోకిల సరోజినీ నాయుడిచే రచించబడిన “మేల్కొను” అను దేశభక్తి గేయంలోని ముగింపు పంక్తులు ఇవి “ది బ్రోకెన్ వింగ్ : సాంగ్స్ ఆఫ్” లో ఇది చివరి కావ్యం.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : ఇక్కడ, అన్ని భారతీయ మతాల ప్రజలు ఆమెను తమ శక్తి మేరకు భక్తితో సేవ చేస్తామని ఆమెకు భరోసా ఇస్తారు. వారు తమ గొప్పతల్లిని, వారి రాణిని మరియు వారి దేవతను తమ ప్రార్థనను వినమని మరియు ఆమె ప్రస్తుత నిద్ర నుండి మేల్కొలపమని పిలుపునిచ్చారు వారు. వారి నిర్భయమైన ఐక్యత మరియు అంకితమైన ప్రయత్నాలు ఆమె ప్రస్తుత బానిసత్వం నుండి ఆమెను విడిపించడానికి ఖచ్చితంగా సరిపోతాయి అంటారు.

విమర్శ : ఈ గీతం ఐక్యత మరియు కార్యచర్య కోసం ఒక ఆత్మను (మనస్సు) కదిలించే పిలుపు. ఇది బలమైన జాతీయ భావాలను వ్యక్తపరుస్తుంది.

Paragraph Questions & Answers (Section A, Q.No.4, Marks: 4)
Answer the following Questions in about 100 words

a) Substantiate the critical comment that the poem”Awake” is a patriotic lyric. (Revision Test – IV)
Answer:
Yes, Sarojini Naidu’s song”Awake’ has been acclaimed as a patriotic lyric. A lyric is poem. A single speaker expresses emotions and thoughts in it. It is noteworthy for its musical quality and rhythm. And its theme is losty. According to it, the poem, “Awake”, has all these qualities in abundance. It is rich in musical element. If expresses strong nationalistic feelings. Thus, the content is patriotic and lience noble. With its preformed theme and artistic and lyrical form the poem is very much entitled to be applauded as patriotic lyric. It is a touching call to all Indians for unity and action. People of all religions pledge to come together to guard their mother, queen and goddess. Hence, this is a patriotic lyric.

అవును, సరోజినీ నాయుడు యొక్క పాట “మేల్కొను” పాట దేశభక్తి గీతంగా ప్రశంసించబడింది. గీతం అనేది ఒక పద్య౦. ఒకే వక్త దానిలో భావోద్వేగాలను మరియు ఆలోచనలను వ్యక్తపరుస్తారు. ఇందులో. ఇది దాని సంగీత నాణ్యత మరియు లయకు ముఖ్యమైంది. మరియు దీని ఇతివృత్తం ఉన్నతమైంది. దీనికి అణుగుణంగా, ఈ పద్య౦ ‘మేల్కొను” ఈ లక్షణాలన్నీ పుష్కలంగా ఉన్నాయి. ఇది సంగీత లక్షణంలో సమృద్ధిగా ఉంటుంది.

ఇది బలమైన జాతీయ భావాలను వ్యక్తపరుస్తుంది. అందువలన, ఇతివృత్తం దేశభక్తి మరియు సాహిత్య రూపంతో ఈ పద్య౦ దేశభక్తి గీతంగా ప్రశంసించబడటానికి చాలా అర్హతగల్గినది. ఐక్యత మరియు కార్యచరణ కోసం భారతీయులందరికీ ఇది హత్తుకునే పిలుపు. అన్ని మతాల ప్రజలు తమ తల్లి, రాణి మరియు దేవతను కోపాడుకోవడానికి కలిసి వస్తామని ప్రతిజ్ఞ చేస్తారు. అందుకే, ఇది దేశభక్తి గీతం.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 4 Awake

b) What do the children implore the mother in the poem, “Awake” ?
Answer:
The patriotic lyric, “Awake” is written by Sarojini Naidu, The nightingale of India. The poem is a servent appeal for unity and action. The nation is personified as our mother. All Indians becomes her children. The poet visualizes all children praying to the mother. They are invoking her to rise from her sound and long sleep and to bless them. So that they may succeed in their holy object of setting her free from the chain of slavery under the British rule. Thus, they implore her to awake from her sleep. They are ready to serve her. It is a soul storing plea for action and unity. The poem stands out for its strong nationalistic feelings.

దేశభక్తిగేయం “మేల్కొను” భారత గాన కోకిల, సరోజినీ నాయుడుచే రచింపబడింది. ఈ పద్య౦ ఐక్యత మరియు కార్యచరణ కోసం తీవ్రమైన విజ్ఞప్తి. దేశం మన తల్లిగా వర్తించబడింది. భారతీయులందరూ ఆమె బిడ్డలయ్యారు. పిల్లందరూ తల్లిని ప్రార్థిస్తున్నట్లు కవి దృశ్యమానం చేస్తారు. బ్రిటీష్ పాలనలో బానిసత్య సంకెళ్ళు నుండి ఆమెను విడిపించే వారి పవిత్రమైన లక్ష్యంలో వారు విజయం సాధించాలని ఆమె దీర్ఘ, ఘాడమైన నిద్ర నుండి లేచి వారిని ఆశీర్వదించమని ప్రార్థిస్తున్నారు. అందువలన, వారు ఆమెను నిద్ర నుండి మేల్కొనమని వేడుకుంటున్నారు. వారు ఆమెకు సేవ చేయడానికి సిద్ధంగా ఉన్నారు. ఇది కార్యాచరణ మరియు ఐక్యత కోసం ఆత్మను, మనస్సును కదిలించే అభ్యర్ధన. ఈ పద్య౦దాని బలమైన, గట్టి, జాతీయవాద భావాలకు చిహ్నంగా నిలుస్తుంది.

c) How do Indians plan to set their mother again in the forefront of glory? (Revision Test – IV)
Answer:
The patriotic lyric, “Awake” is written by Sarojini Naidu, The nightingale of India. According to the poetess, the children of the motherland are invoking her to rise from her sound and long sleep and bless them so that they succeed in their holy object of setting her free from the chain of slavery under, the British rule. The poetess says that her children love her very much. They have a great devotion for their motherland.

They are her true children. They have inherited her pride, moral and spiritual strength they want to preserve these qualities. They will never fail to protect her. They will never desert her. Their hearts are the home of the mother. They are moreover her shield and her alfar. It is with her help that they will be set again in the forefront of glory. All medians should forget their mutual differences for the attainment of freedom and rise against British tyranny.

దేశభక్తి గీతం ‘మేల్కొను’ భారత గాన కోకిల సరోజినీ నాయుడుచే రచింపబడింది. రచయిత ఉద్దేశం, భరతమాత బిడ్డలు, బ్రిటీషు పాలనలో బానిస సంకెళ్ళ నుండి భరతమాతను విడిపిచు వారి పవిత్రమైన లక్ష్యంలో వారు విజయం సాధించాలని ఆమె ఘాడమైన, సుదీర్ఘ నిద్ర నుండి లేచి వారిని ఆశీర్వదించమని ప్రార్థిస్తున్నారు. వారు ఆమెను అమితంగా ప్రేమిస్తున్నారని కవయిత్రి చెప్తుంది. వారు ఆమె నిజమైన బిడ్డలు. ఆమె హుందాను, నీతి మరియు ఆధ్యాత్మిక శక్తిని వారు హక్కుగా పొందినారు. ఈ లక్షణాలను వారు నిలుపుతారు.

ఆమెను రక్షించుటలో వారు ఎన్నడూ విఫలమవ్వరు. ఎన్నడూ ఆమెను వదులుకోరువారు. తల్లికి వారి హృదయాల్లో నివాసం ఏర్పరిచారు. వారు, ఆత్మీయులుగా, ఆమె రక్షణ కవచం మరియు పూజాపీఠం. ఆమె సహాయంతో వారు ఆమెను కీర్తి, ప్రతిష్టల ముందు తిరిగి ఉంచుతారు. బ్రిటీషు వారి క్రూరత్వం, నిరంకుశంకు వ్యతిరేకంగా మరియు స్వాతంత్య్రం సాధించుటకును భారతీయులందరూ వారే పరస్పర వ్యత్యాసాలు మరచి పోవాలి అంటుంది ఐకమత్యంతో పోరాడాలి.

d) What do the children of all creeds promise their mother separately and collectively?
Answer:
The patriotic lyric, “Awake” is written by Sarojini Naidu, the nightingale of India. The poetess says that the children of old creeds promise their mother that they would serve her with devotion to the best of their ability. The Hindus Assure her that they will worship her usual.

The parsees will dedicate the fire of hope burning in their hearts to her service. The muslims will defend her with the sword of their love. The christians convince her that they will show the same devotion and faith in her as they have in Jesus and Mary.

Having assured her separately of their devotion, love and faith followers of different religions call upon their great mother, their queen and their goddess to listen to their prayer and rise from her current sleep they promise her that their united and collective efforts will succeed to set her free from the chains of bondage.

దేశభక్తి గీతం ‘మేల్కొను’ భారత గాన కోకిలచే రచింపబడింది. వారి శక్తి కొలది అంకిత భావంతో భరతమాతకు సేవచేస్తామని, ఆమెకై పోరాడతామని, అన్ని మతాల వారు వారి తల్లి (భరతమాత)కి ప్రతిజ్ఞ చేసారని కవి చెప్తుంది. హిందువులు వారి సహజమైన పద్ధతిలోనే పూలతో ఆమెను పూజిస్తామని చెప్తున్నారు. ఆమె సేవకు పార్శీనులు వారి హృదయాల్లోని ఆశాజ్యోతిని ఆమెకు అంకితం చేస్తామన్నారు. వారి ప్రేమ భక్తి ఖడ్గంతో ఆమెను కాపాడుకుంటామని ముస్లీంలు మారుస్తున్నారు. క్రీస్తు మరియు మేరిమాత పలు చూపిన విశ్వాసం, భక్తినే ఆమెపట్ల చూపుతామంటున్నారు.

క్రిస్టియన్లు వారి భక్తి ప్రేమ మరియు వివ్వాసం గురించి ఆమెకు విడివిడిగా హామీ ఇవ్వడంతో, వివిధ మతాల అనుచరులు తమ గొప్ప తల్లిని వారి రాణిని మరియు దేవతను తమ ప్రార్థనను వినాలని మరియు ఆమె ప్రస్తుత నిద్ర నుండి లేవాలని పిలుపునిచ్చారు. ఆమెను భానిస బంధాల నుండి విముక్తి చేయడానికి తమ ఐక్య మరియు సమిష్టి ప్రయత్నాలు సఫలమవుతాయని వారు ఆమెకు (భరతమాతకు) హామీఇచ్చారు.

Awake Summary in English

About Author

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 4 Awake 1

Sarojini Naidu (13 February 1879 2 March 1949)was an Indian political activist and poet. A proponent of civil rights, women’s emancipation, and anti-imperialistic ideas, she was an important person in India’s struggle for independence from colonial rule. Naidu’s work as a poet earned her the sobriquet ‘the Nightingale of India’, or ‘Bharat Kokila’ by Mahatma Gandhi because of colour, imagery and lyrical quality of her poetry.

Few of his notable works in English:

1905: The Golden Threshold, London: William Heineman[18]
1917: The Broken Wing: Songs of Love, Death and the Spring[19]
1961: The Feather of the Dawn, edited by Padmaja Naidu, Bombay: Asia Publishing House

The poem,”Awake” is written by Sarojini Naidu, the Nightingale of India. It is a patriotic Song. It is the last poem in the first section of “The Broken wing: Songs of Love”. It is dedicated to Mohammad Ali Jinnah, a trusted friend of Sarojini Naidu, It was revived at the Indian National Congress Meetings in Bombay, 1915. In this poem, the worshippers of all Indian religions are brought together to the alfar of mother India to hail her as a “Queen” and a “Goddess”.

It conveys the idea that mother India could be awakened from her slumber and emancipated from her bondage by the united efforts of her sons. To get Independence from the British rule Indians must forget their religions and communal differences and rise like one against the British tyranny. It is a call for unity and action.

In the first stanza, the poetess speaks on behalf of the children of India who implore her to awake from her sleep and who worship her and are ready to serve her. She must lead their prays the dark night of slavery is now about with the hope of freedom. She must awake and cut the chains of slavery which cause so much grief to her children. Their hands will be purified by her blessings. So, that their holy cause may triumph.

They are the true children of their beloved Bharata Mata, and they have inherited her own pride and her own moral and spiritual courage. They will never fail to protect her. Thus will never desert her and they will ever sing the story of her greatness and glory. Their united efforts make her great and stories once again. Such as the dedication of her children and she must respond to their call.

In the next four lines, the followers of different Indian religions assure her that they would serve her with devotion to the best of their ability. The Hindus assure her that they will always worship her as they have been doing so far the parsees assure her that the fire of hope burning on their hearts will be dedicated to her service. The musalmans assure her that they would defend her with the sword of their love. The Christians assure her that they will show the same devotion and faith in their as they have in Jesus and Mary.

In the last two lines, having assured her separately of their devotion and service, the followers of all the different religions call upon their great mother, their green and their goddess to listen to their prayer and awake from her present slumber. Their fearless united and devoted efforts shall certainly be sufficient to free her from her present bondage. The lyrics a soul – stirring call for unity and action. It came from the heart of the poetess and so goes straight to the hearts of her readers.

Awake Summary in Telugu

Note: This summary is only meant for Lesson Reference, not for examination purpose

“మేల్కొను” అను కావ్యం భారత గానకోకిల సరోజినీ నాయుడుచే రచింపబడింది. ఇది దేశభక్తి గీతం “The Broken Wing: Songs of Love” యొక్క మొదటి విభాగంలో ఇది చివరి పద్య౦. ఇది సరోజినీ నాయుడు యొక్క నమ్మకమైన స్నేహితుడు, మహ్మద్ ఆలీ జిన్నా కు అంకితం చేయబడింది. ఇవి 1915లో బోంబేలో జరిగిన జాతీయ కాంగ్రెస్ సమావేశంలో పఠించబడింది. ఈ పద్య౦లో అన్ని భారతీయ మతాల ఆరాధనలు ఆమెను (భరతమాతను) రాణిగా మరియు దేవతగా కీర్తించడానికి భారతమాత యొక్క బలిపీఠం వద్దకు తీసుకురాబడ్డారు.

ఆమె కుమారుల పెక్కు ప్రయత్నాల ద్వారా భారతమాత తను నిద్ర నుండి మేల్కొనబడుతుందని మరియు ఆమె బానిసత్వం నుండి విముక్తి పొందగలదనే ఆలోచనను ఇది తెలియజేస్తుంది. బ్రిటీషు పాలన నుండి స్వాతంత్ర్యం పొందడానికి భారతీయులు తమ మతాలు మరియు మతభేదాలను మరచిపోయి బ్రిటీష్ దౌర్జన్యానికి వ్యతిరేఖంగా ఒక్కటిగా ఎదగాలి. ఐక్యత మరియు కార్యచరణకు ఇది పిలుపు.

మొదటి చరణంలో, కవయిత్రి తన నిద్ర నుండి మేల్కొనమని మరియు ఆమెను ఆరాధించి మరియు ఆమెకు సేవచేయడానికి సిద్ధంగా ఉన్న భారతమాత ముద్దుబిడ్డల తరుపున మాట్లాడుతుంది. ఆమె వారి ప్రార్థనను వినాలి. బానిసత్వం యొక్క చీకటి రాత్రి ఇప్పుడు స్వేచ్ఛ, స్వాతంత్య్రపు యొక్క ఆశతో ఉంది. ఆమె మేల్కొని తన పిల్లలకు చాలా దుఃఖం కలిగించే బానిసత్వపు గొలుసులను తెంచుకోవాలి. ఆమె ఆశీర్వాదం ద్వారా వారి చేతులు శుద్ధి చేయబడతాయి, తద్వారా వారి పవిత్రమైన కారణాన్ని విజయవంతం చేస్తారు.

ప్రియమైన భరతమాత యొక్క నిజమైన బిడ్డలు వారు మరియు ఆమె హుందా మరియు ఆమె నీతివంతమైన మరియు ఆధ్యాత్మిక ధైర్యాన్ని వారసత్వంగా వారు పునికి పుచ్చుకున్నారు. ఆమెను రక్షించుటలో వారు ఎన్నడూ విఫలమవ్వరు. వారు ఆమెను ఎన్నడూ త్యజించరు మరియు ఆమె కీర్తి మరియు గొప్పతనం గురించి ఎల్లప్పుడూ స్తుతిస్తారు. వారి యొక్క పెక్కు ప్రయత్నాలు తిరిగి ఆమెను కీర్తివంతం చేస్తాయి. అలాంటి అంకితభావానికి, ఆమె వారి పిలుపుకి ప్రతిస్పందించాలి.

తర్వాత నాల్గు శ్రేణుల్లో, వివిధ భారతీయ మతాల ఆరాధకులు వారి శక్తికొలది అంకితభావంతో ఆమెకు సేవ చేస్తామని నమ్మకంగా చెప్తున్నారు. ఇప్పటి వరకూ ఎలా పూజించారో అలానే ఆమెను ఎల్లప్పుడూ పూజిస్తారని నొక్కి చెప్తున్నారు హిందువులు. ఆమె సేవకు, పాటకు వారి హృదయాల్లోని ఆశాజ్యోతిని ఆమెకు అంకితం చేస్తామన్నారు. వారి ప్రేమ, భక్తి ఖడ్గంతో ఆమెను కాపాడుకుంటామని ముస్లీములు నొక్కి చెప్తున్నారు. క్రీస్తు మరియు మేరిమాత పట్ల చూపిన విశ్వాసం, భక్తినే ఆమె పట్ల చూపుతున్నామంటున్నారు క్రిష్టియన్లు.

చివరి రెండు శ్రేణుల్లో, వారి భక్తి, ప్రేమ, విశ్వాసం గురించి ఆమెకు విడివిడిగా హామీ ఇవ్వడంతో వివిధ మతాల ఆరాధనలు తమ గొప్ప తల్లివి, వారి రాణిని మరియు దేవతను తమ ప్రార్థనను వినాలని మరియు ఆమె ప్రస్తుత నిద్ర నుండి లేవాలని పిలుపునిచ్చారు. ప్రస్తుత బానిసత్వం నుండి ఆమెను విముక్తి చేయుటకు, వారి నిర్భయ ఐక్య మరియు అంకిత ప్రయత్నాలు సరిపోతాయి కాబట్టి, ఇవి కార్యచరణ మరియు ఐక్యత కోసం ఇది మనస్సును కరిగించే అభ్యర్ధన. ఇది కవయిత్రి మనస్సు నుండి వస్తుంది మరియు పాఠకుల హృదయాలకి నేరుగా వెళ్ళింది.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 4 Awake

Awake Summary in Hindi

Note: This summary is only meant for Lesson Reference, not for examination purpose

‘अवेक’ नामक कविता भारत को किला सरोजिनी नायडु से लिखी गई है । वह देशभक्ति गीत है । यह “द ब्रोकेन विंग’ : ‘सांग्स ऑफ़ लव’ के अंतिम खंट की आखनी कविता है । यह सरोजिनी नायडु के विश्वासनीय मित्र मुहम्मद अली जिन्ना को समर्पित है । 1915 में बंबई में भारतीय कांग्रेस की बैठक में गाया गया । इस कविता में भारत माता को रानी और देवता के रूप में परिवर्तितकर उसे अभिवादन करने के लिए भारतीय सभी धर्मों के उपासकों को एकता में लाया गया ।

यह इस विचार को व्यक्त करता है कि भारतमाता को नींद से जगाया जा सके और आपनी संतानों के सम्मिलित प्रयास से अपने दास्य बंधन से मुक्त किया जा सके । ब्रिटिशशासन से स्वतंत्रता प्राप्त करने के लिए । भारतीयों को अपने धर्मों, सांप्रदायिक संघर्ष करना चाहिए । यह एकता और क्रिया का आहवान है ।

परले छंद में, कवयित्री भारत के बच्चों की ओर से कहती हैं, जो भारत माता के उसकी नींद से जगाते हैं, जो उसकी पूजा करते हैं, और जो उसकी सेवा करने तैयार होते हैं । दासता का घोर अंधकार को दूर करने और स्वतंत्रता की आशा करने के लिए उसे बच्चों को बहुत परेषानी होती है । उसके आशईर्वात से उसके बच्चों के बहुत परेशानी होती है । उसके आशीर्वाद से उसके बच्चों के हाथ शुद्ध हो जाएँगे ताकि उनके पवित्र उद्देश्य की निजय हो सके ।

वे अपने प्यारी भारढकतमाता के सच्चे बच्चे हैं ओर उनमें उसका अहम अभिमान है और उसके नैतिक मूल्य हैं और आध्यात्मिक साहस है। उसकी रक्षा में वे कभी असफल नहीं होते । वे उसे कभी नहीं छोडेंगे। वे उसकी महानता और महिमा की कहानी गाएँके । उनके सम्मिलित प्रयास फिरसे उसकी महानता और चमक प्रदान करते हैं । उसकी संतानों का समर्पण एसा ही है । उसे उनके निमंत्रण की प्रतिक्रिया दिखानी चाहिए ।

यह गीत एकता और प्रतिक्रिया की आत्म प्रेरित पुकार है । यह कवियत्री के हृदय से निकला है और उसके पाठकों के हृदयों में सीधा घुसता हैं ।

Meanings and Explanations

waken (v) (వెయికన్)/ weɪ.kən/ : wake from sleep : నిద్ర నుండి మేలు కొలుపు, भारतीय

thy(adj) / (మీ యొక్క)/ ðaɪ/ : your : మీ యొక్క (old and poetic form of you), प्रार्थना करना, विनती करना

implore(v)/(ఇంప్లో (ర్))/ɪm’plɔ:r/ : request, plead: విన్నవించుకొను : तु, तुम

thee (pron)/ (దీ)/θri:/ : you : మిమ్ము (old from ‘you’) ; घुटने टेकना

kneel (v)/ (నీల్) /ni:l/ : rest on one’s bent knees : మోకాళ్ళను నేలకు ఆనించి వాని ఆధారంగా కూర్చొను, (భక్తిని సూచిస్తూ ), पूजा करना, प्रेम करना

adore (v) (అడో(ర్)) /ədɔ:r/ : worship; ఆరాధించు, పూజించు, शरमाना, उत्साह से लाल होना

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 4 Awake

aflush(adj) /(అప్లష్)/ə’fl\(\Lambda \int\) : red with excitement ; ఆనందంతో ఎర్రబారిన : बंधन, गुलामी

morrow(n)/ (మోర ఉ)/ ‘mɒr.əʊ/ : tomorrow (poetic form) : काटना, भागों में बाँटना

thou (pron)/ (దౌ) //ðaʊ / : మీరు, दुःख, बाधाएँ

bondage (n)/ (బొండిజ్)/’bɒn.dɪdʒ/ : Slavery : బానిసత్యము; బంధము, गुलाम बनाना, अधीनस्थ बनाना, विनम्र बनाना

sever(n) / (సెవ(ర్)) /’sev.ər/ : cut, tear : కోసివేయు; త్రుంచు ; पवित्र बनाना

woes(n-pl): (వఉజ్)) : troubles /wəʊz/: కష్టములు, शानदार जीत

enthral(v)(also-enthrall)(ఇన్ త్రోల్ ) : /ɪn’θrɔ:l/ :make slaves ; బానిసలుగా చేయు ; bound ; బంధించు, निकट भविष्य में हम उसे हासिल करते हैं ।

hallow (v) : (హ్యాల ఉ) /’hæl.əʊ/ : sanctify; make pious : పవిత్రము చేయు, अधिकार के रूप में कुछ लेना था प्राप्त करना

triumphs(n-pl)/ (టై అమ్ ఫ్ జ్) /’traɪ.əmf/ : successes : విజయములు, कई अलग- अलग प्रकार के :

thine (pron)/(దైన్)/ ðaɪn/ : your’s (old form) మీవారము ; మీవి, गर्व – प्रसन्न या संतुष्ट होने की भावना); व्यकित-निष्ठा

inherit(v)/ (ఇన్ హెరిట్)/ɪn’her.ɪt/ : receive something as a right : వారసత్వముగా, హక్కుగా పొందు ; त्यागः छोड़ देना, छूटना

manifold(adj) : (మ్యానిఫ ఉల్డ్ )/(mæn.ɪ.fəʊld/ : of various types; हिलना, असफल होना

forsake(v)/(ఫ(ర్)సె ఇక్) /fɔ:seɪk/ : leave: వదిలివేయు, सुरक्षात्मक हिस्सा, बचाव की बात

falter (y)! (ఫ(ర్)సె ఇక్)/’fɒl.tər/ : fail : విఫలమగు, తప్పచేయు, स्तेमाल की जानेवाली एक सपाट संरचना

shield (n) (ఫోల్లట (ర్))/ʃi:ld/ : something that protects : ఆదారణంగా ఉండునది, महान राष्ट्रों की प्रथम पंक्ति में

altar(n) (షీల్ డ్ ) / ɔ:l.tə(r)/ : pieous place in temples : గర్భ గుడి పవిత్ర స్థలము, ताज पहनाय

dauntless (adj) / (డోంట్ లస్) /dɔ:nt.ləs/ : fearless : నిర్భయంగా, विश्वास, भरोसा

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 4 Awake

avails (v) / (అవె ఇల్)/ ‘əveɪl/ : serve : assist : సేవించు, సహాయపడు, निर्भय भक्ति

hearken (v) / (హా (ర్)కన్) / ‘ha:kən/ : listen విను, सुनाना

hail (v) (హెయిల్) /heɪl/ : call, salute : పిలుచు, గౌరవించు, स्वागत, निमंत्रण

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 12th Lesson Thermal Properties of Matter Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 12th Lesson Thermal Properties of Matter

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between heat and temperature. [TS Mar. ’15]
Answer:
Differences between heat and temperature :

Heat Temperature
1. Heat is a form of energy. 1. It represents relative degree of hotness (or) Coldness of a body.
2. Unit: joule (or) calorie 2. Unit: °C or °F
3. It is cause 3. It is effect.
4. Heat is measured by calorimeter 4. It is measured by thermometer.
5. Quantity of heat supplied Q = m st 5. Change in temperature of a body ∆ t = \(\frac{Q}{ms}\)

Question 2.
Explain triple point of water.
Answer:
The temperature of a substance remains constant during its change of state.

A graph plotted between temperature (T) and pressure (P) of a substance during change of state is called “phase diagram”.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 1

In phase diagram of water, the P – T plane is divided into three regions.

The line ‘AO’ is called fusion curve. It gives equilibrium temperature and pressure between solid and liquid states.

The line ‘CO’ is called vaporisation curve. It gives equilibrium temperature and pressure between liquid and vapour states.

The line ‘BO’ is called sublimation curve. It gives the relation between of temperature and pressure between solid and vapour states.

Triple Point:
At point ‘O’ the curves AO, BO and CO will intersect.

It gives the temperature and pressure at which solid, liquid and vapour states of water are in equilibrium.

Coordinate of triple point of water a temperature = 273.16 K, pressure = 0.006 atmos (or) 611 pascals.

Question 3.
What are the lower and upper fixing points in Celsius and Fahrenheit scales? [TS Mar. ’16; AP Mar. ’19, ’18 ’16, May ’14]
Answer:
Centigrade (Celsius) scale of temperature:
In centigrade scale of temperature lower fixed point is freezing point of water at one atmosphere pressure, as 0°C. The upper limit is boiling point of water at 1 atm pressure, as 100°C.

Fahrenheit scale of temperature :
In Fahrenheit scale, the lower fixed point is freezing point of water at one atmosphere pressure, as 32°F. The upper fixed point is boiling point of water at 1 atm pressure, as 212°F.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 4.
Do the values of coefficients of expansion differ, when the temperatures are measured on Centigrade scale or on Fahrenheit scale?
Answer:
Yes. Coefficients of expansion α, αa and αv are not same in Celsius scale and in Fahrenheit scale. In Fahrenheit scale values of α, αa and αv are less than those in Celsius scale.

Since magnitude of 1°C > magnitude of 1°F this change takes place. The values of Celsius scale are 1.8 times more than the values in Fahrenheit scale.
αF = 5/9 αc

Question 5.
Can a substance contact on heating? Give an example. [AP Mar. ’18, ’16, May ’16; TS May, ’18, ’16]
Answer:
Yes. Some substances will contact on heating. Ex: Leather, rubber, cast Iron type metal.

Question 6.
Why gaps are left between rails on a railway track? [TS Mar. ’19; AP Mar. ’19, ’17, ’16, ’09; May ’16; June ’15]
Answer:
To allow the linear expansion rails.

In summer temperature of atmosphere increases so rails will expand. If no gap is given between rails then the rails will bend it leads to accidents. If gap is given the rails will expand into that gap and that track is safe.

Question 7.
Why do liquids have no linear and areal expansions? [TS Mar. ’19]
Answer:
Liquids have only volume expansion. No linear expansion or areal expansion. Because liquids does not have any independent shape they must be taken in a container. So we will consider only volume of liquid.

Question 8.
What is latent heat of fusion? [AP & TS May ’17]
Answer:
Latent heat of fusion (melting):
It is defined as the amount of heat energy absorbed or rejected by unit mass of substance while converting from solid to liquid or from liquid to solid.

Question 9.
What is latent heat of vapourisation? [AP Mar. ’13]
Answer:
Latent heat of vapourisation :
It is defined as the amount of heat energy absorbed or rejected by unit mass of substance while converting from liquid to vapour or from vapour to liquid state.

Question 10.
Why are utensils coated black? Why is the bottom of the utensils made of copper? [AP May ’18; TS Mar. ’18]
Answer:
Lower portion of the utensils is in contact with fire. Black bodies are good heat absorbers. So, a black bottom will absorb more heat.

Copper is a good conductor of heat. So, copper is used at the bottom of cooking utensils.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 11.
What is triple point of Water? Mention the values of temperature and pressure at triple point of water. [TS June ’15]
Answer:
Triple point:
The temperature and pressure where a substance can coexist in all its three states is called the “triple point”.

i.e., The substance will exist as a solid, as liquid and as vapour at that particular temperature and pressure.

For water the triple point is at a temperature of 273.16 K and at a pressure of 6.11 × 10-3 atmospheres or nearly 610 pascals.

Question 12.
State Boyle’s law and Charles law. [AP June 15; TS Mar. 15]
Answer:
Boyle’s Law :
At constant temperature, the volume (V) of a given mass of a gas is inversely proportional to its pressure (P).
∴ V ∝ \(\frac{1}{P}\) ⇒ PV = constant = K.

Charles Law:
At constant pressure, the volume (V) of a given mass of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature (T).
∴ V ∝ T ⇒ \(\frac{V}{T}\) = K (constant)

Question 13.
State Wein’s displacement law. [AP Mar. ’17]
Answer:
Wein’s Displacement Law :
The wavelength (Ain) of maximum intensity of emission of black body radiation is inversely proportional to absolute temperature (T) of the black body.
i.e., λm ∝ \(\frac{1}{T}\) (or) λm = \(\frac{b}{P}\)
where ‘b’ is called ‘Wein’s constant”.

Question 14.
Ventilators are provided in rooms just below the roof. Why?
Answer:
Density of hot air is less. So in a room hot air goes to top layers i.e., nearer to the roof.

When ventilators are provided nearer to the roof hot air will escape easily from room. So we feel that the room is cool and circulation of air will become easy.

Question 15.
Does a body radiate heat at 0 K? Does it radiate heat at 0°C?
Answer:
According to Precost’s theory, every body above zero Kelvin will radiate heat energy to the surroundings.
So, i) A body at O’ Kelvin does not radiate heat energy.
ii) A body at 0°C i.e., at 273Kwill radiate heat energy.

Question 16.
State the different modes of transmission of heat. Which of these modes require medium? [TS May ’18]
Answer:
Transmission of heat is of three types.
1) Conduction 2) Convection 3) Radiation

For propagation of heat energy medium is required in case of conduction and convection.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 17.
Define coefficient of thermal conductivity and temperature gradient.
Answer:
“The coefficient of thermal conductivity”
(K) it is the quantity of heat flowing normally per second through unit area of the substance per unit temperature gradient.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 2

‘Temperature gradient” is defined as the change in temperature along the conductor per unit length.

Temperature gradient
Change in temperature
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 3

Question 18.
Define emissive power and emissivity.
Answer:
Emissive power:
The emissive power of a body is defined as the energy radiated by the body per second per unit area at a given temperature and wavelength.

Emissivity:
Emissivity is defined as the ratio of the emissive power of a body to that of a black body at the same temperature.

Question 19.
Is there any substance available in nature that contracts on heating? If so, give an example. [TS May ’16]
Answer:
Yes. Some substances will contact on heating.
Ex: Leather, rubber, cast Iron type metal.

Question 20.
What is greenhouse effect? Explain global warming. [AP Mar. ’15, ’13; TS Mar. & May ’16]
Answer:
Green house effect: Earth will absorb heat radiation and reradiate heat energy of longer wavelength. This longer wave length heat radiation is reflected back to earth due to green house gases such as Carbon dioxide [CO2], Methane (CH4) Chloroflurocarbons, Ozone (O3), etc. As a result temperature of earth’s atmosphere is gradually increasing. This is known as “green house effect.”

Global warming:
Earth receives heat energy during day time from sun. It reradiates heat energy in the form of longer electromagnetic waves.

But due to presence of green house gases the longer electromagnetic waves were reflected back to earth. As a result temperature of earth’s atmosphere is gradually increasing.

This process will increase with the increased content of green house gases in atmosphere. As a result temperature of earth’s atmosphere increases gradually.

Question 21.
Define absorptive power of a body. What is the absorptive power of a perfect black body?
Answer:
Absorptive power of a body is defined as the ratio of energy absorbed by the body within the wave length range of A and A + dA to the total energy flux following on the body.
Absorptive power,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 4

Question 22.
State Newton’s law of cooling. [AP Mar. ’18, ’16, May ’18, ’17, June ’15; TS Mar. ’18, TS May ’16]
Answer:
Newton’s Law of cooling states that the rate of loss of heat of a hot body is directly pro-portional to the difference in temperature between the body and its surroundings pro-vided the difference in temperatures is small and the nature of the radiating surface remains same.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 5
Where k is the proportionality constant

Question 23.
State the conditions under which Newton’s law of cooling is applicable. [AP May ’16; TS June ’15]
Answer:
Newton’s law of cooling is applicable

  1. loss of heat is negligible by conduction and only when it is due to convection.
  2. loss of heat occurs in a streamlined flow of air i.e., forced convection.
  3. temperature of the body is uniformly distributed over it.
  4. temperature difference between the body and surroundings is moderate i.e., upto 30 K.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 24.
The roofs of buildings are often painted white during summer. Why? [TS Mar. ’17, ’15; AP May ’16]
Answer:
When roofs of buildings are coated white we will feel relatively cold during summer.

Absorptive power of white surface is less. So roofs coated white will absorb less heat energy. So less quantity of heat is transmitted into the house. So we feel less hot or cold inside the house.

Question 25.
What is thermal expansion? [TS Mar. ’16]
Answer:
The increase in interatomic distance due to thermal energy is called “thermal expansion”.

As a result the length solids or volume of liquids or pressure of gases will increase.

Question 26.
Why is it easier to perform the skating on the snow? [TS Mar. ’16]
Answer:
Due to increase of pressure melting point decreases, So it is easier to perform the skating on the snow.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain Celsius and Fahrenheit scales of temperature. Obtain the relation between Celsius and Fahrenheit scales of temperature.
Answer:
Celsius (Centigrade) scale of temperature :
In centigrade scale of temperature lower fixed point is freezing point of water at one atmosphere pressure, as 0°C. The upper limit is boiling point of water at 1 atm pressure, as 100°C.

The interval between lower limit and upper limit [100 – 0 = 100] is divided into 100 equal parts and each part is called 1°C.

Fahrenheit scale of temperature :
In Fahrenheit scale, the lower fixed point is freezing point of water at one atmosphere pressure, as 32°F. The upper fixed point is boiling point of water at 1 atm pressure, as 212°F.

The interval between upper fixed point and lower fixed point (212 -32 = 180) is divided into 180 equal parts and each part is called 1°F.

Relation between Fahrenheit and Celsius scale of temperatures:
In both scales, lower limit and upper limit are same. The only change is in numerical values of lower and upper limits.

In Fahrenheit lower limit = 32, upper limit = 212, difference of limits = 180

In Celsius scale lower limit = 0, upper limit = 100, difference of limits = 100
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 6
C = Temperature in Celsius scale.
F = Temperature in Fahrenheit scale.

Question 2.
Two identical rectangular strips one of copper and the other of steel, are riveted together to form a compound bar. What will happen on heating?
Answer:
When two dissimilar metals say copper and steel are riveted together that arrangement is called “bimetallic strip”.

When a bimetallic strip is heated copper strip will expand more than steel due to more expansion coefficient.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 7

Since they are riveted they must expand as a common piece. As a result bimetallic strip will bend in the form of an arc. For the metallic strip with high a its length is more so it is on the outer side. For the strip with less a its length is less. It will be at the inner side of the arc.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
Pendulum clocks generally go fast in winter and slow in summer. Why? [TS Mar. ’19, ’17]
Answer:
In summer due to increase in temperature of atmosphere length of pendulum will increase.

Time period of pendulum T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)

T ∝ √l. So it will make less number of oscillations per day. So clock will run slowly in summer.

In winter temperature of atmosphere decreases. So length of pendulum decreases.

Hence time period of oscillation will also decrease. As a result, pendulum will make more oscillations per day so clocks will run fast in winter.

Question 4.
In what way is the anomalous behaviour of water advantageous to aquatic animals? [AP Mar. ’18, 17, 14; May 18. 17, 14; TS May ’18]
Answer:
In cold countries and at polar region temperature falls below 0°C at winter. So surface of water will be frozen. Due to anomalous expansion of water even though the surface of lakes, and sea are frozen water will exist at bottom layers at 4°C.

Different layers in between ice and bottom will have different temperatures like 1°C, 2°C or 3°C. In these layers, aquatic animals are able to survive even in winter.

Anomalous expansion of water helps for the survival of aquatic life at polar region and in cold countries.

Question 5.
Explain conduction, convection and radiation with examples. [TS Mar. ’18, ’16, ’15, June ’15; AP Mar. ’19, ’15, May, ’16]
Answer:
Conduction :
It is a mode of transfer of heat from one part of the body to another, from particle to particle in the direction of fall of temperature without any actual movement of the heated particles.
Ex: When one end of a metal rod is heated, its other end becomes hot. Here, the heat goes from hot end of the metal rod towards cold end, by conduction.

Convection :
It is a mode of transfer of heat from one part of the medium to another part by the actual movement of the heated particles of the medium.
Ex : Seabreeze, Tradewind, etc.

Radiation :
It is a mode of transfer of heat from the source to the receiver without any actual movement of source or receiver and also without heating the intervening medium.
Ex : Heat from sun comes to us through radiation. On standing near fire, we feel hot as heat comes to us through radiation.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain thermal conductivity and coefficient of thermal conductivity.
A copper bar of thermal conductivity 401 W (mK) has one end at 104°C and the other end at 24°C. The length of the bar is 0.10 m and the cross-sectional area is 1.0 × 10-6 m-2. What is the rate of heat conduction along the bar?
Answer:
The ability to conduct heat in solids is called ‘Thermal conductivity.”

Consider a bar with rectangular cross-section as shown in the figure. The faces ABCD and EFGH are maintained at θ1 and θ2 respectively (θ1 > θ2). Heat passes from one end to the other.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 8

The amount of heat conducted (Q) depends on,

  1. Amount of heat conducted Q is proportional to area of cross-section A perpendicular to flow.
    ∴ Q ∝ A ………. (1)
  2. is proportional to temperature difference between the two ends.
    ∴ Q ∝ (θ2 – θ1) …………. (2)
  3. is proportional to the time of flow.
    Q ∝ t ………. (3) and
  4. is inversely proportional to the length of the conductor.
    Q ∝ \(\frac{1}{l}\) …………. (4)

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 9
where k = constant called coefficient of thermal conductivity.

Coefficient of thermal conductivity (k) :
It is defined as the amount of heat conducted normally per sec per unit area of cross-section per unit temperature gradient.
S.I. Unit w m k-1
Dimensional formula = [ M¹L¹T-3θ-1]

Problem:
Thermal conductivity of copper,
Kc = 401 W/m-k
Temperature at one end, θ2 = 104°C
Temperature of 2nd end, θ1 = 24°C
Length of copper bar, l = 0.1 m; Area,
A = 1.0 × 10-6 m-2
Rate of conduction,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 10

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 2.
State the explain Newton’s law of cooling. State the conditions under which Newton’s law of cooling is applicable.
A body cools down from 60°C to 50°C in 5 minutes and to 40°C in another 8 minutes. Find the temperature of the surroundings. [TS May ’17, ’16; AP May ’13]
Answer:
Newtons’ Law of cooling :
The rate of loss of heat of the body is directly proportional to the difference of temperature of the body and the surroundings.

Explanation :
The law holds good only for small difference of temperature. Also, the loss of heat by radiation depends upon the nature of the surface of the body and the area of the exposed surface. We can write
– \(\frac{dQ}{dt}\) = k (T2 – T1) (sign indicates loss) …….. (1)

where k is a positive constant depending upon the area and nature of the surface of the body. Suppose a body of mass ‘m’ and specific heat capacity ‘s’ is at temperature T2. Let T1 be the temperature of the surroundings. If the temperature falls by a small amount dT2 in time dt, then the amount of heat lost is
dQ = ms dT2
∴ Rate of loss of hfeat is given by
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 11
where K = k/ms

Conditions (under which Newton’s law of cooling is applicable):
Newton’s law of cooling is applicable

  1. loss of heat is negligible by conduction and only when it is due to convection.
  2. loss of heat occurs in a streamlined flow of air i.e., forced convection.
  3. temperature of the body is uniformly distributed over it.
  4. temperature difference between the body and surroundings is moderate i.e., upto 30 K.

PROBLEM :
Let ‘θo‘ be the temperature of the surroundings.

In first case :
Initial temperature, θ1 = 60°C
Final temperature, θ2 = 50°C
Time of cooling, t = 5 minutes = 5 × 60 = 300s
From Newton’s law of cooling we can write,

In secoend case :
Initial temperature, θ1 = 60°C
Final temperature, θ2 = 40°C
Time of cooling, t = 13 minutes = 13 × 60 = 780s
Again from Newton’s law of cooling we can write,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 13
On solving equations (1) and (2) we get, θo = 33.33°C

Problems

Question 1.
What is the temperature for which the readings on Kelvin Fahrenheit scales are same?
Solution:
On the Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 14
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 15

Question 2.
Find the increase in temperature of aluminium rod if it’s length is to be increased by 1%. (α for aluminium = 25 × 10-6/°C) [AP Mar. ’15; June ’15]
Solution:
Coefficient of linear expansion of aluminium, α = 25 × 10-6/°C
We know that percentage increase in length
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 16

Question 3.
How much steam at 100°C is to be passed into water of mass 100g at 20°C to raise its temperature by 5°C? (Latent heat of steam is 540 cal / g and specific heat of water is 1 cal / g°C)
Solution:
Latent heat of steam, Ls = 540 cal/g
Specific heat of water, Lw = 1 cal / g°C
Mass of water, mw = 100g

According to method of mixture or from the principle of calorimetry we can write, Heat lost by steam = heat gained by water
i.e., msLs + msSw(100 – t) = mwSw (t – 20)
∴ ms × 540 + ms × 1(100 – 25)
⇒ 100 × 1 × (25 – 20)
⇒ 615ms = 500(or)ms = \(\frac{500}{615}\) = 0.813 g

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 4.
2 kg of air is heated at constant volume. The temperature of air is increased from 293 K to 313 K. If the specific heat of air at constant volume is 0.718 kJ/kg K, find the amount of heat absorbed in kJ and kcal. (J = 4.2 kJ/kcal.)
Solution:
Mass of air, m = 2 kg
Change in temperature, ∆T = 313 – 293 = 20K.
Specific heat at constant volume, Cv = 0.718 k.J/kg – K.
Heat mechanical equivalent, J = 4.2 kJ/k.cal.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 17
∴ Heat energy absorbed,
Q = 2 × 0.718 × 10³ × 20. = 28.72 kJ
= 6.838 k calories.

Question 5.
A clock, with a brass pendulum, keeps correct time at 20°C, but loses 8.212 s per day, when the temperature rises to 30°C. Calculate the coefficient of linear expansion of brass.
Solution:
Temperature of correct time, t1 = 20°C
Loss or gain of time in seconds per day = 8.212 sec.
Final temperature, t2 = 30°C
∴ ∆t = 30 – 20 = 10
α of pendulum material = ?

In pendulum loss or gain of time in seconds per day = 43,200. α ∆t
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 18

Question 6.
A body cools from 60°C to 40°C in 7 minutes. What will be its temperature after next 7 minutes if the temperature of its surroundings is 10°C? [AP May ’13]
Solution:
In first case :
Initial temperature, θ1 = 60°C
Final temperature, θ2 = 40°C
Time of cooling, t1 = 7 minutes
= 7 × 60 = 420s
Temperature of surroundings, θ0 =10°C
From. Newton’s law of cooling, we can write,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 19

In second case:
Initial temperature, θ1 = 40°C
Time of cooling, t2 = 7 minutes = 420s
Again, from Newton’s law of cooling we can write,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 20
on solving equations (1) & (2) we get, 0 = 28°C

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 7.
If the maximum intensity of radiation for a black body is found at 2.65 µ m, what is the temperature of the radiating body? (Wein’s constant = 2.9 × 10-3 mK)
Solution:
Wavelength corresponding to maximum intensity, λmax = 2.65 µm = 2.65 × 10-6 m.
Wein’s constant, b = 2.90 × 10-3 mK.
From Wein s Law, T = \(\frac{\mathrm{b}}{\lambda_{\mathrm{m}}}=\frac{2.90 \times 10^{-3}}{2.65 \times 10^{-6}}\)
= 1094 K.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 3 Hiroshima Child

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material 3rd Lesson Hiroshima Child Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material 3rd Lesson Hiroshima Child

Annotations (Section A, Q.No. 2, Marks: 4)
Annotate the following in about 100 words each.

a) I knock and yet remain unseen. (Revision Test – III)

Introduction: This line is taken from the poem, “Hiroshima Child”, written by Nazim Hikmet. He is a turkish poet, play wright and novelist. He is recognised as one of the greatest poets of the twentieth century. Most of his writings are about war. Content and Meaning: Here, the speaker is a seven-year old. Hiroshima girl. She died when an atom bomb was dropped on Hiroshima during the world war II. The soul of the girl knocks on every door to warn them about the adverse effects of war. But nobody pays attention to her as she invisible.

Critical comment: The speaker begs people to fight for peace and to let children grow happily. The war against war touches our hearts.

కవి పరిచయం : ఈ వ్యాసం నజీమ్ హిక్మెట్ వ్రాసిన “హిరోషిమా చైల్డ్” అను పద్య౦ నుండి తీసుకొనబడింది. అతను ఒక టర్కిష్ కవి, నాటక కర్త మరియు నవలా రచయిత. ఇతడు 20వ శతాబ్దపు గొప్ప కవులలో ఒకడుగా గుర్తింపు పొందాడు. ఇతని రచనలలో చాలా వరకు యుద్ధం గురించినవే.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : ఇక్కడ వ్యక్తి 7 సం॥ల హిరోషిమా చిన్నారి. రెండవ ప్రపంచయుద్ధ సమయంలో హిరోషిమాపై అణుబాంబు వేసినప్పుడు ఈ చిన్నారి చనిపోయింది. ఈ చిన్నారి ఆత్మ ప్రతి తలుపును తడుతూ యుద్ధం యొక్క దుష్ప్రభావాలను గురించి వారిని హెచ్చరిస్తుంది. కానీ, ఎవ్వరూ ఆమెను పట్టించుకోరు. ఆమె కనిపించదు కాబట్టి.

విమర్శ : పిల్లలు సంతోషంగా ఎదగడానికి మరియు శాంతి కోసం పోరాడాలని స్పీకర్ ప్రజలను వేడుకుంటున్నారు. యుద్ధానికి వ్యతిరేఖంగా యుద్ధం మన హృదయాలను తాకుతుంది.

b) I am seven now as I was then
when children die they do not grow.

Introduction: These heart touching lines are taken from the poem.”Hiroshima child”, written by Nazim Hikmet. He is a turkish poet, playwright and novelist. He is recognised as one of the greatest poets of the twentieth century. Most of his writing are about war.

Content & Meaning: Here, the little child knocks on every door. No one hears or sees as the child died at seven in the Hiroshima bomb blast. Since then, the child has felt neither growth nor hunger, nor any wants. The child continues to be in the same state. The vehement plea is for peace, the poet uses a dead child to press upon our guilty conscience.

Critical comment: Through the soul of the little child, the poet begs people to fight for peace and to let children grow happily.

కవి పరిచయం : ఈ హృదయాన్ని కదిలించే పంక్తులు నజీమ్ హిక్మేట్చే రచించబడిన “హిరోషిమా చైల్డ్” అను పద్య౦ నుండి తీసుకొనబడింది.

సందర్భ౦  మరియు అర్థం : ఇక్కడ చిన్నారి ప్రతి తలుపును తడుతుంది. ఏడు సం||ల వయస్సులోనే హిరోషిమా అణుబాంబు దాడిలో చనిపోవటంతో, ఎవ్వరూ ఆ చిన్నారిని చూడలేదు, వినలేరు. అప్పటి నుండి, ఆ చిన్నారి కి ఎదుగుదలలేదు. ఆకలి లేదూ ఏమీలేదు అలానే ఉండిపోయింది. శాంతి కోసం ఒక గట్టి ప్రయత్నం ఇది. కవి ఎదుగుదలలేదు. ఆకలి లేదూ ఏమీలేదు అలానే ఉండిపోయింది. శాంతి కోసం ఒక గట్టి ప్రయత్నం ఇది. కవి చనిపోయిన చిన్నారిని మన మనస్సాక్షిని నొక్కడానికి ఉపయోగించాడు.

విమర్శ : చిన్నారి ఆత్మ ద్వారా శాంతి కోసం పోరాడాలని మరియు చిన్నారులను సుఖంగా ఎదగనివ్వమని ప్రజలను కవి వేడుకుంటున్నారు.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 3 Hiroshima Child

c) I ask for nothing for myself
For I am dead, for I am dead

Introduction: These heart touching lines are taken from the poem.”Hiroshima child”, written by Nazim Hikmet. He is a turkish poet, playwright and novelist. He is recognised as one of the greatest poets of the twentieth century.

Content & Meaning: The little visits every home, seeks neither food nor things. The child no longer needs food or water to survive because we have taken away her life in which these things were actually prevalent. We have taken away everything from this child. She was innocent all along. The poet repeats the lines ” For I am dead for I am dead” throughout the poem to remind us that we have killed this innocent child with our unnecessary violence. He expects our fight for peace.

Critical comment: The poet uses the technique of repetition to convey his theme. The begs us to fight for peace.

కవి పరిచయం : హృదయాన్ని తాకేటటువంటి ఈ పంక్తులు నజీమ్ హిక్ మెట్చే రచించబడిన “హిరోషిమా చైల్డ్” అను కావ్యం నుండి గ్రహించబడినవి. అతను టర్కిష్ కవి నాటక రచయిత మరియు నవలా రచయిత. అతను 20వ శతాబ్దపు గొప్ప కవులలో ఒకడుగా గుర్తింపబడ్డాయి.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : చిన్నారి ప్రతి ఇంటిని సందర్శిస్తుంది. ఆహారం కానీ, వస్తువులు కానీ వెతకటం లేదు. జీవించడానికి ఆహారం లేదా నీరు ఆ చిన్నారికి అవసరం లేదు. ఎందుకంటే ఆ చిన్నారి జీవితాన్ని మనం తుడిచివేసాము. ఆ చిన్నారి సమస్తం మనం తీసుకున్నాము.

ఆ చిన్నారి ఏమీ తెలియని అమాయకురాలు. “నేను చనిపోయాను, నేను చనిపోయాను” అను చిన్నారి పంక్తులను కవి పదేపదే పునరావృత్తం చేస్తున్నాడు. ఎందుకంటే మనం అనవసర హింసతో అమాయకురాలి ప్రాణం తీసాము అన్న విషయాన్ని గుర్తు చేయటానికి ఈ నైపుణ్యాన్ని కవి ఉపయోగించాడు. శాంతి కోసం మన పోరాటాన్ని కవి ఆశిస్తున్నాడు.

విమర్శ : తన ఇతివృత్తాన్ని తెలియజేయుటకు, కవి పునరావృత్తం అను నైపుణ్యాన్ని ఉపయోగిస్తున్నాడు. శాంతికోసం పోరాడమని కవి మనల్ని వేడుకుంటున్నాడు.

d) All that i need is that for peace (Revision Test – III)
you fight today you fight today

Introduction: These heart touching lines are taken from the poem. “Hiroshima child”, written by Nazim Hikmet. He is a turkish poet, playwright and novelist. He is recognised as one of the greatest poets of the twentieth century.

Content & Meaning: The child is the speaker in the poem. She lost her life at seven in the Hiroshima bomb blast. Since then, she has felt neither growth nor hunger. She continues to be in the same state, she visits every home, seek, neither food nor things. She warns us, about the evils of war. As she doesn’t want anything, she begs us to fight for peace. Her desire is to promote peace. She urges us to let every child grow, play and laugh. The only thing she want is peace: Fight for peace.

Critical comment: The poet uses the repetition to demonstrate that we must fight for peace and nothing else, or else innocent people and children would die for our unnecessary injustices.

కవి పరిచయం : ఈ పంక్తులు నజీమ్ హిక్మేట్చే రచించబడిన “హిరోషిమా చైల్డ్” అను పద్య౦లోని చివరి చరణంలోనివి. అతను ఒక టర్కిష్ కవి, నాటక రచయిత మరియు నవలా రచయిత. అతను 20వ శతాబ్దపు గొప్ప కవులలో ఒకడుగా గుర్తింపబడ్డాయి.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : చిన్నారి ఈ పద్య౦లో వక్త. 7 సం||ల చిరు ప్రాయంలోనే హిరోషిమా బాంబుపేలుడులో తన జీవితాన్ని కోల్పోయింది. అప్పటి నుండి ఎలాంట ఎదుగుదల లేదు, ఆకలి లేదు. అలానే ఉండిపోయింది. ప్రతి ఇంటానా సంచరిస్తుంది ఏమీ కోరటం లేదు. ఆహారం లేదా ఏ వస్తువులు అడగటం లేదు. యుద్ధ దుష్ప్రభావాలను గురించి మనల్ని హెచ్చరిస్తుంది. ఆమె ఏమి కోరుకోవటంలేదు.

మనల్ని శాంతి కోసం పోరాడమంటుంది. శాంతి స్థాపన ఆమె కోరిక. ప్రతి చిన్నారిని ప్రశాంతంగా ఎదగనివ్వమని, ఆడుకోనివ్వమని మరియు సంతోషంగా ఉండనివ్వమని మనల్ని అర్జిస్తుంది. కేవలం మన నుండి శాంతి కోసం పోరాడమని ఆ చిన్నారి కోరుకుంటుంది.

విమర్శ : మనందరం శాంతి కోసం పోరాడాలి లేదంటే అమాయక ప్రజలు, చిన్నారులు మన అనవసర అన్యాయాలకు ప్రాణాలు కోల్పోతారు అన్న విషయాన్ని ప్రదర్శించటానికి కవి పునరావృత్తం (మరల, మరల) ను ఉపయోగించాడు.

Paragraph Questions & Answers (Section A, Q.No.4, Marks: 4)
Answer the following Questions in about 100 words

a) What is the theme of the poem,”Hiroshima Child”?
Answer:
Nazim Hikmet is recognised as one of the greatest poets of the 20th century. Most of his writings are about war. His present poem, “Hiroshima Child”, is about a seven year old girl who was killed in the bombing of Hiroshima in the world war II. The little girl is the speaker in the poem. The soul of the girl knocks on every door to warn them about adverse effects of war. She begs them to fight for peace.

But, nobody pays attention to her as she is invisible. The theme of the poem is to promote peace. The poet uses a character, a standpoint and language to drive home the theme. This technique serves the desired purpose. The reader is made to plunge into thought first and action next. Thus, the vehement plea is for peace. Fight for Peace.

నజీమ్ హిక్మెట్ 20వ శతాబ్దపు గొప్పకవులలో ఒకరుగా గుర్తింపు పొందాడు. ఇతని రచనలలో చాలా వరకు యుద్ధం గురించినవే. ఇతని ప్రస్తుత పద్య౦ “హిరోషిమా చైల్డ్” రెండవ ప్రపంచయుద్ధంలో హిరోషిమాపై అణుబాంబు దాడిలో చనిపోయిన ఏడు సంవత్సరాల చిన్నారి గురించిన కావ్యం. ఆ చిన్నారే వక్త ఈ పద్య౦లో, యుద్ధ దుష్ప్రభావాల గురించి ప్రజలను హెచ్చరించడానికి, ఆ చిన్నారి ఆత్మ ప్రతి తలుపు తడుతుంది. వారిని శాంతి కోసం పోరాడమని ఆ చిన్నారి వేడుకుంటుంది.

కానీ, ఆమెకానరాదు కాబట్టి, ఎవ్వరీమెను పట్టించుకోరు. శాంతి స్థాపనే ఈ పద్య౦ యొక్క ఇతి వృత్తం. దీనికోసం కవి ఒక పాత్రను మరియు చక్కటి సరళమైన భాషను ఉపయోగించాడు. తాను అనుకున్న ఉద్దేశ్యం నెరవేరుస్తుంది ఈ నైపుణ్యం. పాఠకుడిని మొదట ఆలోచింపజేసి, తర్వాత కార్యానుకుడిని చేస్తుంది. అలా, శాంతి కోసం ఒక గట్టి ప్రయత్నం ఇది. శాంతి కోసం పోరాటం.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 3 Hiroshima Child

b) Why does the poet appeal for peace through a dead child?
Answer:
Nazim Hikmet is recognised as one of the greatest poets of the 20th century. Most of his writings are about war. His present poem, “Hiroshima Child” is about a seven year old girl who died in the Hiroshima bomb blast during the World War II. The little girl is the speaker in the poem. The soul of the girl knocks on every door to warn them about to let children grow happily.

The poet to fight for peace and to let children grow happily. The poet appeals for peace through the mouth of the little girl, a dead child. It is because the poet wants to press upon our guilty conscience. The child no longer needs food or water to survive because we have taken away her life with our unnecessary injustices. We have taken away everything from her. Thus, the poet uses a dead child to touch our hearts to promote peace.

20వ శతాబ్దపు గొప్ప కవులలో ఒకరుగా నజీమ్ హిక్మెట్ గుర్తిపు పొందాడు. ఇతని రచనలలో అధికం యుద్ధం గురించినవే. ఇతని ప్రస్తుత పద్య౦ “హిరోషిమా చైల్డ్”, రెండవ ప్రపంచయుద్ధ సమయంలో హిరోషిమాపై అణుబాంబు దాడిలో ప్రాణాలు కోల్పోయిన ఏడు సం॥ చిన్నారి గురించి. ఆ చిన్నారే ఈ పద్య౦లో వక్త. యుద్ధ దుష్ప్రభావాల గురించి ప్రజలను హెచ్చరించడానికి ఆ చిన్నారి ప్రతి తలుపు తడుతుంది. శాంతి కోసం పోరాడమని మరియు చిన్నారులను సంతోషంగా, ఆనందంగా ఎదగనివ్వమని జనాన్ని వేడుకుంటుంది. చనిపోయిన, చిన్నారి నోటి నుండి శాంతి కోసం పోరాడమని జనాన్ని కవి అర్జిస్తున్నాడు.

ఎందుకంటే, మన మనస్సాక్షికి కవి నొక్కి చెప్పాలనుకుంటున్నాడు. మనం మన అనవసరమైన అన్యాయాలతో ఆ చిన్నారి ప్రాణాలను తీసుకున్నాము కాబట్టి ఆ బిడ్డ జీవించడానికి ఆహారం లేదా నీరు అవసరంలేదు. మనము ఆమె నుండి సమప్తం తీసుకున్నాము. అలా శాంతిని పెంపొందించడానికి, మన హృదయాలను తాకడానికి చనిపోయిన చిన్నారిని కవి
ఉపయోగించాడు.

c) Describe the feelings of the child when she knew that she was dead at the age of seven. (Revision Test – III)
Answer:
Nazim Hikmet is recognised as one of the greatest poets of the 20th century. Most of his writings are about war. His present poem, “Hiroshima Child” is about a seven year old girl who died in the Hiroshima bomb blast during the World War II. The little girl is the speaker in the poem. The girl knocks on every door.

She says that she doesn’t want anything. It is because she has already died. She no longer needs food or water to survive. She continues to be in the same state. She visits every home and begs them to fight for peace and to let children grow happily. Her feelings touch our hearts and awake us plunge into thought first and action next through her mouth, the poet emphasizes the need for peace.

20వ శతాబ్దపు గొప్ప కవులలో ఒకరుగా నజీమ్ హిక్మెట్ గుర్తిపు పొందాడు. ఇతని రచనలలో అధికం యుద్ధం గురించినవే. ఇతని ప్రస్తుత పద్య౦ “హిరోషిమా చైల్డ్”, రెండవ ప్రపంచయుద్ధ సమయంలో హిరోషిమా పట్టణంపై అణుబాంబు దాడిలో ప్రాణాలు కోల్పోయిన ఏడు సం॥ చిన్నారి గురించినది ఈ పద్య౦. చిన్నారి ఈ పద్య౦లో వక్త. ఈ చిన్నారి ప్రతి తలుపు తడుతుంది. తనకు ఏమి వద్దని చెప్తుంది. ఎందుకంటే ఆమె చనిపోయింది అప్పటికీ.

ఆమె జీవించడానికి ఆహారం లేదా నీరు అవసరంలేదు. ఆ పరిస్థితిలోనే ఉంటుంది. ప్రతి గడప సందర్శిస్తుంది. అందరినీ శాంతి కోసం పోరాడమని, చిన్నారులను ఆనందంగా ఎదగనివ్వమని వేడుకుంటుంది. ఆమె అభిప్రాయాలు మన హృదయాన్ని తాకుతున్నాయి. మరియు మనల్ని మొదటిగా ఆలోచింపచేస్తాయి. తర్వాత కార్యోన్ముకులను చేస్తున్నాయి.

d) “I ask for nothing for myself” Why do you think the child asked nothing for herself?
Answer:
Nazim Hikmet is recognised as one of the greatest poets of the 20th century. Most of his writings are about war. His present poem, “Hiroshima Child” is about a seven year old girl who died in the Hiroshima bomb blast during the World War II. The little girl is the speaker in the poem. The soul of the girl knocks on every door to warn them about the evils of war. She begs people to fight for peace. She needs neither food nor water to survive. It is because we have taken away everything from this child.

Therefore, she says that she needs, nothing for herself the only thing she wants is our fight for peace which makes the future generation happy to live, Her plea is for peace. Fight for peace. She urges us to fight for peace and nothing else or else innocent people and children will die for our injustices.

20వ శతాబ్దపు గొప్ప కవులలో ఒకరుగా నజీమ్ హిక్మెట్ ఒకరుగా పేరు పొందాడు. ఇతని రచనలలో అధికం యుద్ధం గురించినవే. ప్రస్తుత కావ్యం “హిరోషిమా బాలిక”, రెండవ ప్రపంచయుద్ధ కాలంలో హిరోషిమా బాంబు దాడిలో మరణించిన ఏడు సం॥ చిన్నారి గురించి. ఆ చిన్నారి ఈ పద్య౦లో వక్త. ఈ చిన్నారి ప్రతి తలుపు తడుతూ యుద్ధం దుష్ప్రభావాల గురించి హెచ్చరిస్తుంది. శాంతి కోసం పోరాడమని జనాన్ని వేడుకుంటుంది.

తాను చనిపోయినందున, తనకేమీ అవసరం లేదు అంటుంది. జీవించడానికి అవసరమైన ఆహారం లేదా నీళ్ళ సహితం అవసరం లేదు ఆ చిన్నారికి ఎందుకంటే మనమే ఆ చిన్నారి జీవితాన్ని చిదిమివేశాము. కావున, తనకేమి అవసరం లేదు అంటుంది. తాను కోరుకున్నది కేవలం శాంతి కోసం మన పోరాటం. అదే మన భవిష్యత్తు.

One the Grasshopper and Cricket Summary in English

About Author

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 3 Hiroshima Child 1
Nazım Hikmet Ran (15 January 1902 – 3 June 1963) commonly known as Nazim Hikmet was a Turkish-Polish poet, playwright, novelist, screenwriter, director and memoirist. He was acclaimed for the “lyrical flow of his statements”. Described as a “romantic communist” and “romantic revolutionary”, he was repeatedly arrested for his political beliefs and spent much of his adult life in prison or in exile. His poetry has been translated into more than fifty languages.

1961: Legend of Love (by Arif Malikov)
1935: Letters to Taranta-Babu (Poem)
1966-67, Human Landscapes from My Country (Poem)
1965: The Epic of the War of Independence(Poem)

The heart touching poem, ‘Hiroshima Child’ is written by Nazim Hikmet. He is Turkish poet, playwright and novelist. His present poem is about a seven-year-old girl who died in the Hiroshima bomb attack during the world war II. It deals with the adverse effects of war loss of life, innocence and destruction. It is a call for peace.

This is a short poem of only five stanzas. The little girl, who is no longer alive, is the speaker in the poem. The poet describes the experiences of the little girl during the war. He wants to remind us of the innocent lives that were killed in the bombing of Hiroshima in the world War II. Therefore, he uses a character to drive home theme. The poem begins with the little girl knocking on every door. The soul of the girl knocks on every door to warn them about the evils of war. She requests them not fight as she was victim of it.

She begs them to fight for peace. But, No one hears or sees as she is invisible. It is because she died at seven in the bomb blast since then the child has felt neither growth nor hunger, nor any wants. She continues to be in the same state. The poet respects the lines “For I am dead for I am dead” throughout the poem to remind us that we have killed this innocent child with our unnecessary violence.

In the third stanza, the poet depicts the child’s hair, eyes and bones to drive into our heads that we hard stained a poor child who was just like us. Here, the child visits every home and seeks, neither food nor things. The poet respects that the wild no longer needs any material things because she is dead. The vehement plea is for peace.

In the final stanza, the girl begs people to fight for peace and to let children grow, play and laugh happily. The poet has delivered a very single but serious message in a clear and short manner. Therefore, we must fight for peace and nothing else, or else innocent people and children will die for our wicked actions or unnecessary injustices. The war against war touches our hearts.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 3 Hiroshima Child

One the Grasshopper and Cricket Summary in Telugu

Note: This summary is only meant for Lesson Reference, not for examination purpose

మనస్సును రంజింపజేసే కావ్యం “హిరోషిమా చైల్డ్” నజీమ్ హిక్మేట్చే రచింపబడింది. అతను ఒక టర్కిష్ కవి, నాటకరచయిత మరియు నవలారచయిత. రెండవ ప్రపంచ యుద్ధ సమయంలో హిరోషిమా పట్టణం పై అణుబాంబు దాడి జరిగినపుడు చనిపోయిన ఏడు సం॥ల చిన్నారి గురించి ఇతని ప్రస్తుత పద్య౦. యుద్ధ దుష్ప్రభావాలు ముఖ్యంగా జీవితాలు కోల్పోవడం, చిన్నార్లు చనిపోవటం మరియు వినాశనం జరగటం మొ॥వి ఈ పద్య౦ ఇతివృత్తం. ఇది శాంతి కోసం పిలుపు.

ఇది కేవలం ఐదు stanzas గల చిన్న పద్య౦. చనిపోయిన చిన్నారి ఈ పద్య౦లో వ్యక్తి. యుద్ధ సమయంలో ఆ చిన్నారి అనుభవాలు, వేదనలు గురించి కవి వివరిస్తున్నాడు. రెండవ ప్రపంచయుద్ధ సమయంలో హిరోషిమాకై అణుబాంబు దాడిలో చంపబడిన అమాయక జీవితాలు గురించి మనకు తెలియజేయాలనుకుంటున్నాడు. కావున, ఒక చిన్నారి పాత్ర ద్వారా తన సందేశాన్ని అందిస్తున్నాడు. చిన్నారి ఆత్మ యొక్క దుష్ప్రభావాలను గురించి మనల్ని హెచ్చరించడానికి ప్రతి తలుపు తడుతుంది.

అలా గడపగడపకు తిరుగుతూ యుద్ధం చేయవద్దని ప్రాదేయపడుతుంది. తాను దాని బాధితురాలుగా, శాంతి కోసం పోరాడమని వేడుకొంటుంది. కానీ, ఆమెను ఎవ్వరూ పట్టించుకోరు. ఆమె కానరాదు కాబట్టి. ఎందుకంటే ఆ చిన్నారి 7 సం॥ల వయస్సులోనే బాంబుదాడిలో మరణించింది కాబట్టి అప్పటి నుండి, ఆ చిన్నారికి ఎదుగుదల లేదు, ఆకలి లేదు, ఏమిలేదు. అలానే ఉండిపోయింది. మన అనవసర హింసతో ఆ అమాయక చిన్నారిని చంపివేశామని గుర్తుచేయటానికి పద్య౦ ఆసాంతం కవి “For Iam dead for Iam dead” అను పంక్తులను ఉపయోగిస్తున్నాడు మళ్ళీ మళ్ళీ.

మూడవ stanza లో మనలాంటి చిన్నారిని మనం చంపేశాం అని ఆ చిన్నారి జుట్టు, కళ్ళు మరియు ఎముకలు మన తలల్లోకి ఎక్కిరించేలా కవి వర్ణించాడు. ఇక్కడ ఆ చిన్నారి ప్రతి ఇంటిని సందర్శిస్తుంది. ఆహారం కానీ వస్తువులు కానీ ఏదీ వెతకదు. ఆ చిన్నారి చనిపోయినందున ఆమెకు ఇకపై ఎటువంటి పదార్థాలు, వస్తువులు అవసరం లేదని కవి పునరావృత్తం చేస్తాడు. శాంతి కోసం గట్టి విన్నపం ఇది.

ఆఖరి చరణంలో ఆ చిన్నారి శాంతి కోసం పోరాడాలని మరియు పిల్లలు పెరగడానికి, ఆడుకోవడానికి మరియు సంతోషంగా నవ్వడానికి ప్రజలను వేడుకుంటుంది. కవి చాలా సరళమైన కానీ గంభీరమైన సందేశాన్ని స్పష్టంగా మరియు తేలికగా అందించారు. కాబట్టి, మన ప్రపంచ శాంతికోసం పోరాడాలి. లేదంటే అమాయక ప్రజలు మరియు పిల్లలు మన దుష్ట చర్యలను లేదా అనవసర అన్యాయాలను చనిపోతారు. యుద్ధానికి వ్యతిరేఖంగా యుద్ధం, మన హృదయాలను తాకుతుంది.

One the Grasshopper and Cricket Summary in Hindi

Note: This summary is only meant for Lesson Reference, not for examination purpose

दिल को छूनेवाली ‘हीरोशिमा चाइल्ड’ कविता नज़ीम हिकमेट से लिखी गई है । वे एक तुर्की कवि, नाटककार और उपन्यासकार हैं । यह वर्तमान कविता एक सात वर्षीय लड़की के बारे में है, जो द्वितीय विश्व युद्ध के दौरान हीरोशिमा बम हमले में मर गई थी । यह युद्ध के प्रतिकूल प्रभावों, जीवन की हानि और विनाश से संबंधित है । यह शांति का आहवान है ।

यह केवल पाँच छदों की एक छोटी कविता के रूप में है। छोटी लड़की, जो अब जीवित नहीं है, कविता में वक्ता है । कवि युद्ध में गोता लगानेवाले छोटी लड़की के अनुभवों का वर्णन करते हैं । वे हमें उन निर्दोष लोगों की याद दिलाना चाहते हैं, जो द्वितीय विश्व युद्ध में हिरोशिमा की बमबारी में मारे गए थे । वे होम थीम को चलाने के लिए एक चरित्र का उपयोग करते है । कविता का आरंभ छोटी लड़की के हर दरवाजे पर दस्तक देने से होता है। लड़की की आत्मा लड़ाई की बुराई के बारे में चेतावनी देनी के लिए हर दरवाजे पर दस्तक देती है, वह उनसे मतलड़ने का अनुरोध करती है क्यों कि वह उसका शिकार थी ।

वह उनसे शांति के लिए लड़ने की भीख माँगती है । लेकिन कोई नहीं सुनता था नहीं देखता है क्यों कि वह अदृश्य है । ऐसा इसलिए है कि वह सात साल की उम में बम विस्फोट में मरगई । तब से लडकी को न तो कोई विकास हुआ और न ही भूख, न ही कोई इच्छाएँ । वह उसी स्थिति में बनी हुई है । कवि पंक्तियों को दोहराते हैं, ‘फ़ार आई एम डेड, फ़ार आई एम डेड’, पूरी कविता में हमें याद दिलाने के लिए कि हमने इस मासूम बच्चे को अपनी अनावश्यक हिंसा से मार डाला है ।

तीसरे छंद में कवि ने बच्ची के बालों, आँयों और हड्डियों को हमारे म्स्तष्कों में घुसाने के लिए दर्शाया है कि हम ने एक बेचारी बच्ची को मार डाला है जो हमारी जैसी ही थी । इधर बच्ची हर घर जाती है और न तो खाना माँगती है और न चीजें । कवि दोहराते हैं कि बच्ची को किसी भौतिक वस्तु की आवश्यकार नही हैबथाकि वह मन चुकी है । उसका प्रगाढ अनुनय विनय शांति का है ।

अंतिम धंद में, लड़की लोगों से माँगती है कि वे शांति के लिए लड़ें और बच्चों को बढ़ने, खेलने और खुशी से हँसने दें। कवि ने स्पष्ट और संक्षिप्त तरीके से एक बहुत ही सरल लेकिन गंभीर संदेश दिया है । अतः शांति के लिए अवश्य लड़ें और कुछ नहीं वरना हमारे दुष्ट कार्यों और अनावश्यक प्रवृत्ति से मासूम लोग और बच्चे मरेंगे । युद्ध के खिलाफ युद्ध हमारे दिलों को छूता है ।

Meanings and Explanations

Hiroshima (prop.n)/ (హిరోషిమా)/ : a city in Japan; became known well to the world as powerful (atom and hydrogen) bombs were dropped on it an 06.08.1945 during the World War II; జపాన్ నగరం, 1945 ఆగస్ట్ 6న అణుబాంబుల తాకిడితో (రెండవ ప్రపంచ యుద్ధంలో) ప్రపంచానికి ఈ పట్టణం బాగా తెలిసింది. ఆ అంశమే ప్రస్తుత పద్యానికి మూలాధారము.
जापान में एक शहर : दुनिया के लिए अच्छी तरह जाना जाता है क्योंकि द्विती ( ) विश्वयुद्ध के दौरा न. 06-08-1945 को शक्तिशाली (परमाणु और, हाइड्रोजन) बम गिराए गए थे :

tread (n)/(ట్రడ్)/tred : a step ; అడుగు, నడక ; एक कदम : एक सैर

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 3 Hiroshima Child

knock(v) /(నోక్) / nɒk: తలుపు పై కొట్టు తట్టు లోపలికి వెళ్ళుటకు అనుమతికై;

scorched (స్కో(ర్)చ్ ట్)/skɔ:tʃt : burned ; కాల్చబడును, जला हुआ

swirling (v+ing )(adj) / (స్వ(ర్)లింగ్) / swз:lŋ () : twisting ; సుడులు తిరుగుతున్న, घूमना

scattered (స్క్యా ట(ర్)డ్) : dispersed; spread; వెదజల్లబడెను, बिखरा हुआ, फैलाव

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 11th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Fluids Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 11th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define average pressure. Mention it’s unit and dimensional formula. Is it a scalar or a vector? [AP Mar. ’17]
Answer:
Average pressure (Pav) :
The normal force acting per unit is called average pressure.
⇒ Pav = \(\frac{F}{A}\)
Units : In SI = Nm-1
The dimensional formula : ML-1T-2
It is a scalar quantity.

Question 2.
Define Viscosity. What are its units and dimensions? [AP May ’16, ’13; TS May ’18, June ’15)
Answer:
Viscosity :
The property of a fluid which opposes the relative motion between the layers is called viscosity.

Units in SI:
Coefficient of viscosity Nm-2 s (or) Pa – s. (or) Poiseuille
Units in C.G.S : Coefficient of viscosity = poise.
The dimensional formula = ML-1 T-1.

Question 3.
What is the principle behind the carburetor of an automobile? [TS Mar. ’18, ’17; AP Mar. ’19, ’15; June ’15]
Answer:
Carburetor of an automobile is based on the principle of “Bernoulli’s theorem”.

Question 4.
What is magnus effect? [AP May ’18, ’17, Mar. ’15; TS Mar. ’19, ’16]
Answer:
Magnus effect :
When a spinning ball is thrown it deviates from its usual path in flight. This effect is called Magnus effect.

Question 5.
Why are drops and bubbles spherical? [AP Mar. ’18, ’17, ’16, ’14, May ’18, ’17, ’16, ’14, ’13; TS May ’18, ’17, ’16]
Answer:
Due to property of surface tension, the surface of liquid behaves like a stretched membrane and has a tendency to acquire minimum surface area. The sphere has minimum surface area when compared to other shapes of same volume.

Therefore, drops and bubbles acquire spherical shape in order to have the minimum surface area.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 6.
Give the expression for the excess pressure in a liquid drop. [TS Mar. ’17]
Answer:
Excess of pressure in a liquid drop is,
p = \(\frac{2s}{r}\) where ‘s’ = surface tension and ‘r’ = the radius of the liquid drop.

Question 7.
Give the expression for the «<cess pressure in an air bubble inside the iquid. [AP Mar. ’19]
Answer:
Excess of pressure in an air buble inside the liquid is, P = \(\frac{2S}{R}\)
where S = Surface Tension, R = Radius of air bubble of liquid.

Question 8.
Give the expression for the excess pressure in a soap bubble in air. [TS Mar. ’16]
Answer:
Excess of pressure in a soap bubble is, p = \(\frac{4s}{r}\) where
‘s’ = surface tension and
‘r’ = radius of the drop.

Question 9.
What are water proofing agents and water wetting agents? What do they do?
Answer:
Water proofing agents :
The substances which are used to increase the angle of contact are called “water proofing agents”.

Wetting agents:
The substances which are used to decrease the angle of contact are called “wetting agents”.
Ex: Soaps, detergents and dying substances.

Question 10.
Why water droplets wet the glass surface and does not wet lotus leaf? [TS Mar. ’15]
Answer:
Angle of contact between water drop and glass is less than 90° so water drop will wet glass surface.
Angle of contact between water and lotus leaf is greater than 90°. So water drops cannot wet lotus leaf.

Question 11.
What is angle of contact? [AP May ’14, Mar. 16]
Answer:
Angle of contact: It is the angle between the walls of the container and the tangent drawn over the surface of the liquid. This angle must be. measured in the interior side of the liquid.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 12.
Mention any two examples (or) applications that Obey Bernoullis theorem and justify them. [AP Mar. ‘ 18; TS Mar. 15]
Answer:
Applications of Bernoulli’s theorem :

  1. Dynamic lift on the wings of an aeroplane
  2. Swinging of a spinning cricket ball is a consequence of Bernoulli’s theorem.
  3. During cyclones, the roof of thatched houses will fly away. This is a consequence of Bernoulli’s theorem.

Question 13.
When water flows through a pipe, which of the layers moves fastest and slowest? [TS June ’15]
Answer:
When water is flowing through a pipe water layers in contact with bottom layers of pipe will have lowest velocity and water layer just below the top of inner layer of pipe will have highest velocity.

Question 14.
“Terminal velocity is more if surface area of the body is more.” Give reasons in support of your answer.
Answer:
Yes, Terminal velocity of a body is more when surface area of a body is more.

According to Stokes formula, terminal velocity of a smooth spherical body is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 1

The surface area of a spherical body A = 4πr². So when surface increases, ‘r²’ value increases. Hence from Stoke’s formula, Teminal velocity increases.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is atmospheric pressure and how is it determined using Barometer?
Answer:
The atmospheric pressure at any point is equal to the weight of a vertical column of air of unit cross-sectional area extending from that point to the top of tfie earth’s atmosphere.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 2

Determination of atmospheric pressure using Barometer :
A long tube closed at one end and filled with mercury is inverted into a trough of mercury. This device is known as mercury barometer. The space above the mercury column in the tube contains only mercury vapour whose pressure p is so small that it may be neglected. Otherwise there is a perfect vacuum, which is called Torricellian vacuum.

The pressure inside the column at point A must equal the pressure at point B, which is at the same level.

‘P’ at A = Pressure at B = atmospheric pressure = Pa
Pa = ρgh …………. (1)
where ρ = density of mercury
h = height of mercury column

In this experiment, it is found that the mercury column in the barometer has a height of about 76 cm at sea level equivalent to one atmosphere (1 atm).

At sea level, atmospheric pressure is the pressure exerted by 0.76 m of mercury column, i.e., h = 0.76 m
ρ = 13.6 × 10³ kg m-3 And g = 9.8 ms-2.
∴ Atmospheric pressure, Pa = hρg
= 0.76 × (13.6 × 10³) × 9.8
= 1.013 × 105 Nn-2 (or) Pa

A common way of stating pressure is in terms of cm or mm of mercury (Hg). A pressure equivalent to 1 mm is called a torr.
1 torr = 133 Pa.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
State Dalton’s law of partial pressures. [AP Mar. ’14]
Answer:
Dalton’s law of partial pressures :
For a mixture of non interacting ideal gases at same temperature and volume total pressure in the vessel is the sum of partial pressures of individual gases.
i.e. P = P1 + P2 + ……….. total pressure
P1, P2, ……… etc. are individual pressures of each gas.

Question 3.
What is gauge pressure and how is a manometer used for measuring pressure differences?
Answer:
Gauge Pressure :
The pressure p, at depth below the surface of a liquid open to the atmosphere is greater than atmospheric pressure by an amount ρgh. The excess pressure (P – Pa), at depth h is called as “gauge pressure at that point.”

Measurement of pressure difference using a Manometer :
An open tube manometer is a useful instrument for measuring pressure differences. It consists of a U-tube containing a suitable liquid i.e., a low density liquid (such as oil) for measuring small pressure differences and high density liquid (such as mercury) for large pressure differences. One end of the tube is open to the atmosphere and other end is connected to the system whose pressure to be measured.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 3

The pressure P at A is equal to pressure at point B. If the pressure in the vessel is more than the earth’s atmospheric pressure, then the level of liquid in arm-I of U-tube will go down upto point A and the level of liquid in arm-II of U-tube will rise up to point C. Then the pressure of air in vessel is equal to pressure at point A. Let ‘h’ be the difference of liquid levels in the two arms of U-tube. Let ρ be the density of liquid in U-tube and Pa be the atmospheric pressure.

Since, the pressure is same at all points, at the same level, so pressure at point A,
PA = pressure at point B
= pressure at C + pressure due to column of liquid of height ‘h’.
So, PA = PC + hρg or PA – PC = hρg ………… (1)
Here, PC = Pa = atmospheric pressure.
If PA = P, then from eq ………. (1)
P – Pa = hρg
Here, P – Pa = Pg = gauge pressure = hρg.

Question 4.
State Pascal’s law and verify it with the help of an experiment.
Answer:
Pascal’s law:
It states that “the pressure in a fluid at rest is the same at all points if they are at the same height”.

Proof of Pascal’s law:
Consider an element in the interior of a fluid at rest as shown in the figure. The element ABC – DEF is in the form of a right-angled prism.

In principle, this prismatic element is very small so that every part of it can be considered at the same depth from the liquid surface and therefore, the effect of gravity is the same at all these points.

The forces on this element are those exerted by the rest of the fluid and they must be normal to the surfaces of the element.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 4

Thus, the fluid exerts pressures Pa, Pb and Pc on this element of area corresponding to the normal forces Fa, Fb and Fc as shown in fig. on the faces BEFC, ADFC and ADEB denoted by Aa, Ab and Ac respectively. Then,
Fb sin θ2 = Fc and Fb cos θ2 = Fa (by equilibrium)
Ab sin θ2 = Ac and Ab cos θ2 = Aa (by geometry)
Thus, \(\frac{F_b}{A_b}=\frac{F_c}{A_c}=\frac{F_a}{A_a}\) ⇒ Pb = Pc = Pa
Hence, pressure exerted is same in all directions in a fluid at rest.

This proves the Pascal’s law.

Question 5.
Explain hydraulic lift and hydraulic brakes.
Answer:
Hydraulic lift and Hydraulic brakes are based on the Pascal’s law. The principle states that “whenever external pressure is applied on any part of a fluid contained in a vessel, it is transmitted undiminished and equally in all directions

Hydralic lift:
In a hydraulic lift, two pistons are separated by the space filled with a liquid as shown in fig.

A piston of small cross-section A1 is used to exert a force F, directly on the liquid.

The pressure, P = \(\frac{F_1}{A_1}\) is transmitted throughout the liquid to the larger cylinder attached with a larger piston of area A2, which results in an upward force of P × A2.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 5

Therefore, the piston is capable of supporting large force.
F2 = PA2 = \(\frac{F_1A_2}{A_1}\)

By changing the force at A1, the platform can be moved up or down. Thus, the applied force has been increased by a factor of \(\frac{A_2}{A_1}\) and this factor is the mechanical advantage of the device.

Hydraulic brakes :
Hydraulic brakes in automobiles also work on Pascal’s principle. When we apply a little force on the pedal with our foot, the master piston moves inside the master cylinder, and the pressure caused is transmitted through the brake oil to act on a piston of larger area. A large force acts on the piston and is pushed down expanding the brake shoes against brake lining. In this way, a small force on the pedal produces a large retarding force on the wheel.

An important advantage of the system is that the pressure set up by pressing pedal is transmitted equally to all cylinders attached to the four wheels so that the braking effort is equal on all wheels.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 6.
What is hydrostatic paradox?
Answer:
Hydrostatic paradox :
This is useful to prove that the liquid pressure is the same at all points at the same horizontal level.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 6

Consider three vessels A, B and C of different shapes as shown in the figure. They are connected at the bottom by a horizontal pipe. On filling with water, the level in the three vessels is the same though they hold different amounts of water. This is so, because water at the bottom has the same pressure below each section of the vessel.

Thus, it proves that the height of the fluid column is independent of the cross sectional or base area and the shape of the container

Question 7.
Explain how pressure varies with depth.
Answer:
Variation of pressure with depth:
Consider a fluid at rest in a container. Let point 1 is at a height h’ above a point 2 as shown in the figure. Consider a cylindrical element of fluid having area of base ‘A’ and height ‘h’. As the fluid is at rest, the resultant horizontal forces should be zero and the resultant vertical forces should balance the weight of the element. The forces acting in the vertical direction are due to the fluid pressure at the top (P1A) acting downward, at the bottom (P2A) acting upward.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 7

If ‘mg’ is weight of the fluid in the cylinder, we have
(P2 – P1) A = mg …………. (1)
Now, if ρ is the mass density of the fluid, then mass of fluid, m = ρv
⇒ m = ρhA …………. (2)
∴ From (1) and (2)
P2 – P1 = ρgh …………. (3)

Pressure difference depends on the vertical distance ‘h’ between the points (1 and 2), mass density of the fluid p and acceleration due to gravity ‘g’.

If the point 1 under discussion is shifted to the top of the fluid, which is open to the atmosphere, P1 may be replaced by atmospheric pressure (Pa) and we replace P2 by P2 then eq.(2) becomes
P – Pa = ρgh ⇒ P = Pa + ρgh

Thus, the pressure P, at depth below the surface of a liquid open to the atmosphere is greater than atmospheric pressure by an amount ρgh.

Question 8.
What is Torricelli’s law? Explain how the speed of efflux is determined with an experiment.
Answer:
Torricelli’s law :
Torricelli discovered that the speed of efflux from an open tank is given by a formula identical to that of a freely falling body. The word efflux means ‘fluid outflow’.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 8

Determination of speed of Efflux:
Consider a tank containing a liquid of density ‘ρ’ with a small hole at a height ‘y1‘, from the bottom as shown in the figure.

The air above the liquid, whose surface is at height ‘y2‘, is at pressure, P.

From the equation of continuity, we have
V1 A1 = V2A2 ⇒ V2 = \(\frac{A_1}{A_2}\)V1 …….. (1)

It the cross sectional area of the tank, A2 is much larger than that of the hole (i.e., A2 >> A1), then we may consider the fluid to be approximately at rest at the top. i.e., V2 = o.

Now, applying the Bernoulli equation at points (1) and (2) and noting that, at the hole P1 = Pa, the atmospheric pressure, we get.
Pa + \(\frac{1}{2}\)ρv²1 + ρgy1 = P + ρgy2
Taking y2 – y1 = h, we have
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 9

When P > > Pa and 2gh may be ignored, the speed of efflux is determined by the container pressure. Such a situation occurs in rocket propulsion. On the other hand if the tank is open to the atmosphere, then P = Pa and from eq (2), we get
V1 = \(\sqrt{2gh}\) ………….. (3)

This is the speed of a freely falling body, at any point of height ‘h’ during its fall. This equation is known as “Torricelli’s law”.

Question 9.
What is Venturimeter? Explain how it is used.
Answer:
Venturi-meter :
The venturi meter is a device to measure the flow speed of incompressible fluid.

It consists of a tube with a broad diameter and a small constriction at the middle as shown in the figure.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 10

The manometer contains a liquid of density ρm. The speed ν1 of the liquid flowing through the tube at the broad neck area A is to be measured. From equation of continuity, the speed at the constriction, ν2 = \(\frac{A}{a}\) ν1
According to Bernoulli’s equation,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 11

This pressure difference causes the fluid in the U-tube connected at the narrow neck to rise in comparison to the other arm.

The difference in height h measures the pressure difference.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 12

Uses: Venturi meter is used for measuring the speed of incompressible liquid and rate of flow of liquid through pipes.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 10.
What is Reynold’s number? What is its significance?
Answer:
Reynold’s number Re :
Reynold’s number is a pure number which determines the nature of flow of liquid through a pipe.
Re = \(\frac{\rho v d}{\eta}\)
where
η = coefficient of viscosity of the liquid.
ρ = density of liquid
ν = critical velocity of the liquid flowing through the pipe.
d = diameter of the pipe.

Significance :
Re is dimensionless number and therefore, it remains same in any system of units.

The critical Reynold’s number for the onset of turbulence is in the range 1000 to 10000, depending on the geometry of the flow. For most cases

Re < 1000 signifies laminar flow.
1000 < Re < 2000 is unsteady flow.
Re < 2000 implies turbulent flow.

Reynold’s number describes the ratio of the inertial force per unit area to the viscous force per unit area for a flowing fluid.

Question 11.
Explain dynamic lift with examples.
Answer:
Dynamic lift on a spinning ball :
Consider the motion of a spinning ball. Its motion consists of two parts 1) Translatory motion 2) Self rotation called spinning.

1) Translatory motion:
Due to translatory motion it passes through the medium air with a velocity say (V). Due to translatory motion the number of streamlines on the top of the ball and at the bottom of the ball are equal. So there is no resultant force on the ball due to translatory motion through the fluid. Hence dynamic lift is zero.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 13

2) For spinning motion :
Let the ball rotates about its axis with a velocity say ∆V in clockwise direction since surface of ball is not perfectly smooth it will drag air molecules with it. So at the top layers the velocity of air is V + ∆V due to air drag. At bottom layers the velocity of air is V – ∆V.

As velocity is more at top layers pressure is less and velocity is less at bottom layers, so pressure is high at bottom layers. This is due to Bernoulli’s theorem.

Due to the pressure difference at bottom layers and top layers some upward thrust will act on the ball. So some dynamic lift will act on a spinning ball. As a result the path of a spinning ball is curved.

Question 12.
Explain Surface Tension and Surface energy. [AP Mar. ’13]
Answer:
Surface tension the force per unit length on an imaginary line drawn on the surface of the liquid and acting perpendicular to it.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 14

Surface energy:
The work done to increase the surface area of a liquid is called surface energy.
Surface energy = Surface tension × Increase in surface area.

Question 13.
Explain how surface tension can be measured experimentally.
Answer:
To find surface tension of a liquid in laboratory torsional balance is used. It is as shown in figure. It consists of a movable metallic rod fixed on a stretched wire. The position of rod can be adjusted. A glass plate is attached at one end of the rod and weight’s pan is connected at the other end of the rod.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 15

Procedure :
A cleaned glass plate is taken. Its length ‘l’ and thickness ‘t’ is measured. Since thickness ‘l’ is very small when compared with length t, thickness ‘t’ is ignored.

Glass plate is fixed to metallic rod. Necessary weights are placed in the pan and glass plate is made horizontal to the table. Weights in pan W0 is measured. Pure liquid whose surface tension is to be determined is taken in a glass beaker. The liquid is poured until it just touches the glass plate. Now plate is pulled down with some force due to surface tension of liquid. Weights in the pan are gradually increased until the glass plate is just escaped from forces of surface tension. Weights W1 are noted. The experiment is repeated for three to four times and average weight W1 is noted.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 16

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Bernoulli’s principle. From conservation of energy in a fluid flow through a tube, arrive at Bernoulli’s equation. Give an application of Bernoulli’s theorem.
Answer:
Bernoulli’s theorem :
Bernoulli’s theorem states that “when a non viscous liquid flows between two points then the sum of pressure energy, kinetic energy and potential energy per unit mass is always constant at any point in the path of that liquid”.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 17

Bernoulli’s theorem is applicable to non viscous, incompressible and irrotational liquids in streamline flow only.

Proof :
Let us consider that a liquid of density ‘ρ’ is flowing through a pipe of different area of cross sections A1 and A2 as shown.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 18

Let the liquid enters at A1 with a velocity V1 and with a pressure P1, density of liquid at A1 is say ρ. Let the liquid leaves the pipe through A2 with a velocity V2 and pressure P2. Density of liquid at A2 is say ρ.

Since liquid is incompressible, p is con-stant.

At region 1 the liquid will move a distance of V1 ∆t where ∆t is very small time interval. Similarly at region 2 the liquid will move through a distance V2 ∆t.
Work done on fluid at region 1 = W1 = P1 A1
V1 ∆t = P1∆V

Work done on fluid at region 2 = W2 = P2 A2 V2 ∆t = P2 ∆V

Since same volume of liquid pass through the pipe, ∆ is constant.

∴ Work done by fluid = W1 – W2 = (P1 – P2) ∆V → 1

∵ Liquid is uncompressible ‘ρ’ is constant.

So mass of liquid entering the pipe and leaving the pipe ∆m is given by
∆m = ρA1V1∆t = ρ∆V
Change in potential energy of liquid
∆U = ρg∆v(h2 – h1) → 2
Change in kinetic energy of liquid
∆K = \(\frac{1}{2}\)ρ∆v(V²1 – V²2)
From work energy theorem work done = change in energy
∴ ∆W = ∆U + ∆K
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 19

i.e., sum of pressure energy, potential energy and kinetic energy of the fluid is always constant.

Limitations :
Bernoulli ‘s theorem is applicable to non-viscous and uncompressible liquids only.

Applications of Bernoulli’s theorem :

  1. Dynamic lift on the wings of an aeroplane is due to Bernoulli’s theorem.
  2. Swinging of a spinning cricket ball is a consequence of Bernoulli’s theorem.
  3. During cyclones, the roof of thatched houses will fly away. This is a consequence of Bernoulli’s theorem.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
Define coefficient of viscosity. Explain Stoke’s law and explain the conditions under which a rain drop attains terminal velocity, υt. Give the expression for υt.
Answer:
Coefficient of viscosity (η) :
The viscous force acting tangentially on unit area of the liquid when there is a unit velocity gradient in the direction perpendicular to the flow is defined as “Coefficient of viscosity.”

Coefficient of viscossity η = \(\frac{-F}{A}\frac{dx}{dv}\)
Unit Nm-2 – s (or) pascal – second.

According to Stoke’s law, the viscous force acting on a freely falling, smooth spherical body of radius ‘a’ is proportional to the coefficient of viscosity η, radius ‘a’ and velocity ‘υ’ of the body.
∴ F ∝ ηav or F = 6 π η av, where 6π is the proportionality constant.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 20

A rain drop of radius ‘ω’, density ρ falling under gravity through air of density a experiences a force of buoyancy equal to the weight of displaced air which is (\(\frac{1}{2}\)πa³) σg.

The weight of the rain drop acting downwards = (\(\frac{1}{2}\)πa³) ρg.

∴ Resultant force acting downwards = \(\frac{1}{2}\)πa³ρg – \(\frac{1}{2}\)πa³σg

When this force is equal to the viscous drag acting upwards, then the rain drop acquires a constant velocity called terminal velocity, vt.

At terminal velocity viscous drag = 6πηav.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 21

Definition:
Terminal velocity of a body falling through a liquid is defined as that constant velocity which the body acquires when it falls in a fluid.

Problems

Question 1.
Find the excess pressure inside a soap bubble of radius 5 mm. (Surface tension is 0.04 N/m). [TS May ’16]
Solution:
Radius r = 5 mm = 5 × 10-3 m.
Surface tension ST = 0.04 N/m
= 4 × 10-2 N/m.
Excess pressure inside soap bubble
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 22

Question 2.
Calculate the work done in blowing a soap bubble of diameter 0.6 cm. against the surface tension force. (Surface tension of soap solution = 2.5 × 10-2 Nm-1)
Solution:
Work done = Surface tension (S) × increase of area (2 × 4πr²)
∴ W = S ( 4πr² ) × 2
(since the bubble has two surfaces)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 23

Question 3.
How high does methyl alcohol rise in a glass tube of diameter 0.06 cm? (Surface tension of methyl alcohol = 0.023 Nm-1 and density = 0.8 gmcm-3. Assume that the angle of contact is zero)
Solution:
Surface tension of methyl alcohol (S) = 0.023 N/m.
Density, ρ = 0.8 gr/cm³ = 800 kg/m³
Diameter of tube, D = 0.06 cm
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 24

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 4.
What should be the radius of a capillary tube if water has to rise to a height of 6 cm in it ? (Surface tension of water – 7.2 × 10-2 Nm-1)
Solution:
Surface Tension of water,
S = 7.2 × 10-2 N/m
Height of water, h = 6 cm = \(\frac{6}{100}\) m
Radius of capillary tube r = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 25

Question 5.
Find the depression of the meniscus in the capillary tube of diameter 0.4 mm dipped in a beaker containing mercury. (Density of mercury = 13.6 × 10³ Kg m-3 and surface tension of mercury = 0.49 Nm-1 and angle of contact = 135°).
Solution:
Diameter of tube = 0.4 mm ;
∴ Radius, r = 0.2 mm = \(\frac{0.2}{10^3}\) m
Density of mercury = 13.6 × 10³ kg/m³
Angle of contact, 0 = 135°
Surface tension of mercury, S = 0.49 N/m.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 26

Question 6.
If the diameter of a soap bubble is 10 mm and its surface tension is 0.04 Nm-1, find the excess pressure inside the bubble. [TS Mar. ’18, My ’16; AP June ’15; Mar. ’14]
Answer:
Diameter of soap bubble =10 mm
Radius, r = 5 mm = 5 × 10-3m
Surface tension, S = 0.04 Nm-1
Excess pressure inside the soap bubble, P = \(\frac{4S}{r}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 27

Question 7.
If work done by an agent to form a bubble of radius R is W, then how much energy is required to increase its radius to 2R?
Solution:
Energy required to form soap bubble of radius, R = W .
∴ w = 8πR²
Work done to blow a bubble of Radius 2R = 8π(2R)² = 4w
∴ Work done to increase the radius from R to 2R = 4w – w = 3w

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 8.
If two soap bubbles of radii R1 and R2 (in vacuum) coalasce under isothermal conditions, what is the radius of the new bubble. Take T as the surface tension of soap solution.
Solution:
When joined in isothermal condition change in temperature of system is zero. So change in internal energy of the system is zero.
Let
Surface energy of 1st bubble U1 = 8πR2S
Surface energy of 2nd bubble U2 = 8πR²1S
Surface energy of new bubble U = 8πR²2S
But 8πR²S= 8πR²1S + 8πR²2S
⇒ R² = R²1 +R²2
Radius of new bubble R² = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{R}_1^2+\mathrm{R}_2^2}\)

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 2 One the Grasshopper and Cricket

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material 2nd Lesson One the Grasshopper and Cricket Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material 2nd Lesson One the Grasshopper and Cricket

Annotations (Section A, Q.No. 2, Marks: 4)
Annotate the following in about 100 words each.

a) The poetry of earth is never dead.

Reference: This beautiful line is taken from the sonnet, “On the Grasshopper and Cricket” written by John Keats, an English Romantic poet. He devoted his life to the perfection of poetry.

Context and Meaning: In the poem, John Keats depicts the beauty of Nature. He expresses his feelings regarding Natures song. He refers to it as “The poetry of Earth” which becomes the main them of the poem. During the summer heat birds stop singing. Then Nature’s poetry offers us comfort and joy. The grasshopper’s songs represent Nature’s poetry. Nature is brimming with elements that help living things flourish. As a result even in intense heat, natural elements such as the “Cooling Tree” and “Pleasant weed” can be discovered. The grasshopper songs tirelessly, bringing relief to all those who have grown restless due to the hot sun.

Critical Comment: The poet says that the poetry of earth is never dead. It always keeps singing irrespective of seasons.

కవి పరిచయం : ఈ అందమైన కావ్యం ఆంగ్ల కాల్పనిక కవి జాన్ కీట్స్ చే రచించబడిన “On the Grasshopper and Cricket” అను సోనెట్ నుండి తీసుకొనబడింది. అతను తన జీవితాన్ని కవిత్వం యొక్క పరిపూర్ణతకు అంకితం చేశాడు.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : ఈ పద్య౦లో ప్రకృతి అందం గురించి కీట్స్ వివరిస్తాడు. ప్రకృతి పాటకు సంబంధించి తన భావాలను వ్యక్తపరుస్తున్నాడు. అతను దానిని భూమి యొక్క కావ్యంగా పేర్కొన్నాడు. ఇది పద్యం యొక్క ప్రధాన ఇతివృత్తంగా మారుతుంది. వేసవి వేడి సమయంలో పక్షులు పాడటం మానేస్తాయి. అప్పుడు, ప్రకృతి మనకు సౌఖ్యం మరియు ఆనందాన్ని అందిస్తుంది. మిడత యొక్క పాటలు ప్రకృతి కావ్యాన్ని (ప్రతిబింబిస్తుంది) సూచిస్తాయి. ప్రకృతి జీవుల వృద్ధికి సహాయపడే అంశాలతో నిండి ఉంది. ఫలితంగా తీవ్రమైన వేడిలో కూడా శీతలీకరణ చెట్టు మరియు ఆహ్లాదకరమైన కలుపు మొక్క వంటి సహాజ మూలకాలు కనుగొనబడతాయి. మిడత అలసిపోకుండా పాడుతూ వేడి ఎండల కారణంగా చంచలమైన వారందరికీ ఉపశమనం కలిగిస్తుంది.

విమర్శ : ప్రకృతి/భూమి కావ్యం ఎప్పటికీ కనుమరుగు అవ్వదని కవి చెప్తున్నాడు. ఋతువులతో సంబంధం లేకుండా ప్రకృతి ఎల్లవేళల పాడుతూనే ఉంటుంది.

b) He rests at ease beneath some plesant weed. (Revision Test – I)

Introduction: The above line is taken from the sonnet “On the Grasshopper and Cricket” written by John Keats. He denoted his life to the perfection of poverty.

Context and Meaning: Here the poet expresses his feelings, regarding natures song. The Grasshopper and the Cricket are used as symbols. Seasons may come and go. But Nature never fails to inspire us with its songs. When birds, stop singing in extreme heat, during the summer. The earth is filled with songs of a grasshopper. We can hear the voice of the grasshopper who runs from hedge to hedge. He keeps singing tiredlessly and when he gets tired with fun, he goes under some pleasant weed to take rest.

Critical Comment: The poet sends the message that nature is beautiful all the line, irrespective of the season.

కవి పరిచయం : ఈ వాక్యం జాన్ కీట్స్ చే రచించబడిన “On the Grasshopper and Cricket” అను సోనెట్ (14 పంక్తులు గల ప్రత్యేక పద్య౦ నుండి తీసుకొనబడింది. ఇతను తన జీవితాన్ని కవిత్వం యొక్క పరిపూర్ణతకు అంకితం చేశాడు.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : ఇక్కడ కవి ప్రకృతి పాటకు (కావ్యం)కు సంబంధించి తన భావాలను వ్యక్తపరుస్తున్నాడు. మిడతను మరియు కీచురాయిని చిహ్నాలుగా వాడుతున్నాడు. ఋతువులు రావచ్చు మరియు పోవచ్చు. కానీ, తన పాటలతో మనల్ని ప్రేరేపించటంలో ప్రకృతి ఎన్నడూ విఫలము చెందదు. వేసవి విపరీతవేడిలో పక్షులు అన్నీ పాడటం ఆపినపుడు ప్రకృతి/భూమి మిడత యొక్క పాటలతో నింపబడుతుంది. ఒక పొద నుంచి మరొక పొదకు పరుగెడుతూ, పాడుతున్న మిడత యొక్క స్వరాన్ని మనం వినగలము. ఇది అలసట చెందకుండా, పాడుతూ ఉంటుంది మరియు ఆనందంతో అలసట చెందినప్పుడు సేదతీరుటకు ఆహ్లాదకరమైన కలుపు మొక్క క్రిందకు జారుతుంటుంది.

విమర్శ : ప్రకృతి అన్ని కాలాల్లో అందంగా, రమణీయంగా ఉంటుందని కవి సందేశాన్ని పంపుతున్నాడు ఈ పద్యం ద్వారా.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 2 One the Grasshopper and Cricket

c) On a lone winter evening, when the frost Has wrought a silence, from the stone there shrills the Cricket’s song, in warmth increasing ever.

Introduction: These lines are taken from the second part(sestet) of the sonnet ” On the grasshopper and the Cricket” written by John Keats, a romantic poet. He devoted his life to the perfection of poetry.

Context and Meaning: The poet expresses his feelings regarding Nature’s song. The Grasshopper and the cricket are used as symbols. Seasons may come and go. But Nature never fails to inspire us with its songs. During winter birds stop singing. Here is a deathly silence. Frost spreads its blanket over Nature Regardless, a shrill second comes from beneath stones and it is the cricket singing the cricket’s song restores warmth. We can hear the song of the cricket, which breaks this silence. Thus, the cricket takes up the responsibilities of singing the glory of Nature in winter.

Critical Comment: John keats sends the message that nature is beautiful all the time, irrespective of the season.

కవి పరిచయం : ఈ పంక్తులు రొమాంటిక్ కవి, జాన్ కీట్స్ చే రచించబడిన “On the Grasshopper and Cricket” అను సోనెట్ యొక్క రెండవభాగం, (చివరి ఆరు పంక్తులు) నుండి తీసుకొనబడినవి. కవిత్వం యొక్క పరిపూర్ణతకు ఇతను తన జీవితాన్ని అంకితం చేశాడు.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : ప్రకృతి పాటకు సంబంధించి కవి తన భావాలను వ్యక్తపరుస్తున్నాడు. మిడతను మరియు కీచురాయిలను చిహ్నాలుగా ఉపయోగించాడు. కాలాలు (ఋతువులు) వస్తూ, పోతూ ఉంటాయి. కానీ, ప్రకృతి తన పాటలతో మనల్ని ప్రేరేపించటంలో ఎన్నడూ విఫలమవ్వదు. శీతాకాలంలో, పక్షులు పాడటం ఆపివేస్తాయి. పూర్తి నిశ్శబ్దత ఉంటుంది. దట్టమైన మంచు తన దుప్పటితో ప్రకృతిని కప్పివేస్తుంది.

అయినప్పటికీ, సంబంధం లేకుండా, వాళ్ళ క్రింద నుండి ఒక గంభీరమైన శబ్దం, స్వరం వస్తుంది. కీచురాయి గానం, ఈ నిశ్శబ్ధాన్ని విచ్ఛిన్నం చేసే కీచురాయి పాటను మనం వినవచ్చు. ఈ విధంగా, కీచురాయి చలికాలంలో ప్రకృతి వైభవాన్ని పాడే/ఆలపించే బాధ్యతను తీసుకుంటుంది.

విమర్శ : ప్రకృతి అన్ని కాలాల్లో అందంగా, రమణీయంగా ఉంటుందన్న సందేశాన్ని జాన్కీట్స్ ఈ పద్య౦ ద్వారా తెలియజేస్తున్నాడు.

d) And seems to one in drowsiness halflost; (Revision Test – I)
The Grasshopper’s among some grassy hills

Introduction: These are the conducting lines of the poem “On the Grasshopper and Cricket” written by John Keats, a Romantic poet. He devoted his life to the perfection of poetry.

Context and Meaning: John Keats celebrates the music of the Earth. He finds beauty in hot summer as well as in the cold winter. Here, the grasshopper is symbol of hot summer and cricket is symbol of cold winter. During the winter season in the frosty evening, the birds stop singing songs. At that time the cricket begins to sing. He spreads the warmth of joy everywhere. The people who are half sleep feel that it is the grasshopper song which is coming from the grassy hills. Thus, he depicts the beauty of Nature.

Critical Comment: The poet sends the message that nature is beautiful all the time, irrespective of the season. In a similar way, we should be joyful in our life and be happy in all situations.

కవి పరిచయం : ఇది రొమాంటిక్ కవి జాన్ కీట్స్ చే రచించబడిన “On the Grasshopper and Cricket” అను పద్య౦ యొక్క ముగింపు పంక్తులు. ఇతను కవిత్వం యొక్క పరిపూర్ణతకు తన జీవితాన్ని అంకితం చేశాడు.

సందర్భ౦ మరియు అర్థం : జాన్ కీట్స్ భూమి/ప్రకృతి యొక్క సంగీతాన్ని ప్రశంసిస్తున్నాడు. అతి వేసవిలోను మరియు అతి శీతాకాలంలోను ప్రకృతి సౌందర్యాన్ని, రమణీయతను ఇతను గుర్తిస్తున్నాడు. ఇక్కడ మిడత తీవ్ర వేసవి కాలానికి చిహ్నం మరియు కీచురాయి చల్లని శీతాకాలానికి చిహ్నం. చలికాలంలో అతి శీతలమైన సాయంత్రం, పక్షులు పాడటం మానేస్తాయి. ఆ సమయంలో, కీచురాయి పాడటం ప్రారంభమౌతుంది. అతను ప్రతిచోటా ఆనందం యొక్క వెచ్చదనాన్ని సుఖాన్ని వ్యాప్తి చేస్తాడు. సగం నిద్రలో ఉన్నవారు పచ్చటి కొండల నుండి వచ్చే మిడతపాట అని భావిస్తారు. ఆ విధంగా, ప్రకృతి అందాన్ని సౌందర్యాన్ని అతను వర్ణిస్తున్నాడు.

విమర్శ : కాలంతో సంబంధం లేకుండా, ప్రకృతి ఎల్లవేళలా అందంగా ఉంటుందని కవి సందేశం పంపాడు. అన్ని సందర్భాలలో, మనం జీవితంలో ఆనందంగా ఉండాలి.

Paragraph Questions & Answers (Section A, Q.No.4, Marks: 4)
Answer the following Questions in about 100 words

a) What is the theme of the poem on the Grasshopper and Cricket? (Revision Test – I)
Answer:
The poem “On the Grasshoppers and Cricket’ is written by John Keats, an English Romantic poet. He has devoted his life to the perfection of poetry. In this poem, John Keats depicts the beauty of Nature. He says that the poetry of earth as symbols to praise Nature is never ending beauty.

Seasons may come and go but Nature never fails to inspire us with its songs. When birds stop singing in extreme heat, the earth is filled with the songs of a grasshopper. He sings endlessly, but when tired rests under some pleasant weed. During winter birds stop singing. There is a deathly silence. Frost spreads its blanket over Nature. Regardless, a shrill second comes from beneath stones and it is the cricket singing. Its song restores warmth. Thus, the small creatures prove to the world that the poetry of earth never ceases.

“On the Grasshopper and Cricket” అను పద్యం ఆంగ్ల రొమాంటిక్ కవి జాన్ కీట్స్ చే రచింపబడింది. కవిత్వం యొక్క పరిపూర్ణతకు ఇతను తన జీవితాన్ని అంకితం చేశాడు. ఈ పద్యంలో, ప్రకృతి యొక్క సౌందర్యాన్ని కీట్స్ వివరిస్తున్నాడు. ప్రకృతి/భూమి యొక్క కవిత్వం/సంగీతం, పాట ఎప్పటికీ నిలిచిపోదు అని అంటున్నాడు ఇతడు. శాశ్వతమైన ప్రకృతి సౌందర్యాన్ని స్తుతించుటకు, ప్రశంసించుటకు ఇతను మిడతను మరియు కీచురాయిలను చిహ్నాలుగా ఉపయోగించాడు. ఋతువులు, కాలాలు రావాలి, పోవాలి కానీ ప్రకృతి తన పాటలతో, సంగీతంతో మనల్ని ప్రేరేపించడంలో ఎన్నడూ విఫలం చెందదు. తీవ్రమైన వేసవి వేడిలో పక్షులు పాడటం ఆపినపుడు,  భూమి/ప్రకృతి మిడత పాటలతో నింపబడుతుంది. ఇది నిరంతరాయంగా పాడుతూ ఉంటుంది.

అయితే అలసట చెందినపుడు, ఆహ్లాదకరమైన కలుపు మొక్క కింద విశ్రాంతి తీసుకుంటుంది. శీతాకాలంలో పక్షులు పాడటం ఆపుతాయి. అక్కడ పూర్తి, ఘోరమైన నిశ్శబ్దం ఉంటుంది. మంచు తన దుప్పటిని ప్రకృతి మీద కప్పుతుంది. అయినప్పటికీ, రాళ్ళ క్రింద నుండి ఒక గంభీరమైన శబ్దం, స్వరం వస్తుంది. అది కీచురాయి గానం. దీనిపాట సౌఖ్యాన్ని పునరుద్దిస్తుంది. అలా, ప్రకృతి కవిత్వం ఎప్పటికీ కనుమరుగవ్వదని, నిలిచిపోదని ఈ సూక్ష్మజీవులు ప్రపంచానికి ఋజువు చేస్తున్నాయి.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 2 One the Grasshopper and Cricket

b) According to Keats, when does one hear a cricket’s song?
Answer:
The poem ” On the Grasshopper and Cricket” is written by John Keats. He is an English Romantic poet. He has developed his life to the perfections of poetry. According to him, the poetry of earth never ceases. He uses the Grasshopper and Cricket as symbols to praise Nature’s never ending beauty. Seasons may come and go. Nature never fails to inspire us with its songs. During cold winter, the birds stop singing.

There is deathly silence. Frost spreads fits blanket over Nature. Then a shrill sand comes from beneath stones and it is the Cricket singing. He breaks this silences. So, we can hear the song of the Cricket in winter. Its song restores warmth.

“On the Grasshopper and Cricket” అను పద్య౦ జాన్ కీట్స్ చే రచింపబడింది. ఇతను ఒక రొమాంటిక్ కవి. ఇతను తన జీవితాన్ని కవిత్వ పరిపూర్ణతకు అంకితం చేశాడు. ఈ పద్య౦లో ప్రకృతి యొక్క సౌందర్యాన్ని వర్ణిస్తున్నారు. ఇత) ఉద్దేశ్యంలో ప్రకృతి కావ్యం శాశ్వతం. ఎన్నడూ కనుమరుగు అవ్వదు. వాటన్నిటికీ కనుమరుగు అవ్వని ప్రికృ ) సౌం గర్యాన్ని ప్రశంసించుటకు, ఇతను మిడతను మరియు కీచురాయిలను చిహ్నాలుగా ఉపయోగించాడు. కీచురాయి అతి శీతాకాలానికి చిహ్నం ఇక్కడ. (కాలాలు) ఋతువులు రావచ్చు పోవచ్చు.

కానీ ప్రకృతి తన సంగీతంతో మనల్ని ప్రేరేపించుటలో ఎన్నడూ విఫలం చెందదు. అతి శీతాకాలంలో, పక్షులు పాడటం నిలిపివేస్తాయి. అక్కడ పూర్తిగా నిశ్శబ్దం. మంచు తన దుప్పటిని ప్రకృతి మీద పరచుతుంది. అప్పుడు ఒక గంభీరమైన స్వరం రాళ్ళ క్రింద నుండి వస్తుంది. అది కీచురాయి గానం. ఈ నిశ్శబ్దాన్ని ఆ స్వరం విచ్ఛిన్నం చేస్తుంది. శీతాకాల సమయంలో మన కీచురాయి పాటను వినగలం. దీని పాట సుఖం, వెచ్చదనాన్ని ఇస్తుంది. పునరుద్దరిస్తుంది.

c) When does a grasshopper sing?
Answer:
The poem” On the Grasshopper and Cricket” is written by John Keats. He is an English Romantic poet. He has developed his life to the perfections of poetry. In this poem, he depicts the beauty of nature. He says that the poetry of earth never ceases. He uses the Grasshopper and Cricket as symbols to praise Nature’s never ending beauty. Seasons may come and go. But Nature never fails to inspire us with its songs.

During hot summer, all the singing birds stop singing and take rest under the shady branches of trees. But the song of the nature goes on. We can hear the voice of the grasshopper, who runs from hedge to hedge. He sings endlessly, but when tired rests under some pleasant weed. Thus, the grasshopper sings during summer.

“On the Grasshopper and Cricket” అను కావ్యం జాన్ కీట్స్ చే రచింపబడింది. ఇతను ఒక ఆంగ్ల రొమాంటిక్ కవి. కవిత్వం యొక్క పరిపూర్ణతకు తన జీవితాన్ని అంకితం చేశాడు. ఈ పద్య౦లో ప్రకృతి సౌందర్యాన్ని ఇతను వర్ణిస్తున్నాడు. ప్రకృతి కావ్యం (భూమి) శాశ్వతం అది ఎప్పటికీ కనుమరుగు అవ్వదు అని చెప్తున్నాడు. ఎప్పటికీ కనుమరుగు అవ్వని, శాశ్వతమైన ప్రకృతి సౌందర్యాన్ని ప్రశంసించుటకు, కవి మిడతను మరియు కీచురాయిలను చిహ్నాలుగా ఉపయోగించాడు. ఋతువులు (కాలాలు) రావచ్చు, పోవచ్చు కానీ ప్రకృతి తన పాటలతో మనల్ని ప్రేరేపించుటలో ఎన్నడూ విఫలం చెందదు. తీవ్ర వేసవి సమయంలో పాడే పక్షులన్నీ పాడటం ఆపి చెట్ల కొమ్మల నీడలో విశ్రాంతి తీసుకుంటాయి.

కానీ, ప్రకృతి మాత్రం తన పోరును కొనసాగిస్తుంది. పొదల నుండి పొదలకు పరుగెడుతూ పాడే మిడతను మనం వినగలం. ఇది నిరంతరం పాడుతుంది. అయితే అలసిపోయినప్పుడు ఒక సుందరమైన కలుపు మొక్క క్రింద విశ్రాంతి తీసుకుంటుంది. అలా, మిడత వేసవికాలంలో పాడుతూ ఉంటుంది.

d) Discuss the common features between the grasshopper and cricket.
Answer:
The poem ” On the Grasshopper and Cricket” is written by John Keats. He is an English Romantic poet. He has developed his life to the perfections of poetry. In this poem, he depicts the beauty of nature. He says that the poetry of earth never ceases. He uses the Grasshopper and the Cricket as symbol to praise nature’s never ending beauty. Seasons may come and go. But, nature never fails to inspire us with its songs.

Therefore both the grasshopper r and the cricket are the representative voices of nature’s music or poetry. Both offer a soothing effect to the extremities of climate. The grasshoppers song balances the extreme heat during the summer by providing music that is comforting and pleasing the cricket does the same during winter.

“On the Grasshopper and Cricket” అను కావ్యం జాన్ కీట్స్ చే రచింపబడింది. ఇతను ఒక ఆంగ్ల రొమాంటిక్ కవి. కవిత్వం యొక్క పరిపూర్ణతకు తన జీవితాన్ని అంకితం చేశాడు. ఈ పద్య౦లో, అతను ప్రకృతి సౌందర్యాన్ని వర్ణిస్తాడు. ప్రకృతి కావ్యం పాట ఎల్లవేళలా ఉంటుంది. అది ఎన్నటికీ ఆగిపోదని చెప్తున్నాడు. ఎల్లవేళలా ఉం ప్రకృతి సౌందర్యాన్ని ప్రశంసించుటకు, మిడతను మరియు కీచురాయిని చిహ్నాలుగా కవి ఉపయోగించాడు. కాలాలు రావచ్చు, పోవచ్చు.

కానీ, ప్రకృతి తన మధురమైన పాటలతో మనల్ని ప్రేదెంచుటలో ఎన్నడూ విఫలమవ్వదు. కాబట్టి మిడత మరియు కీచురాయి రెండూ ప్రకృతి సంగీతం లేదా కవిత్వానికి ప్రాతినిధ్య స్వరాలు. రెండూ వాతావరణం యొక్క అంత్య భాగాలకు ఓదార్పు ప్రభావాన్ని అందిస్తాయి. మిడత పాట ఓ కారని మరియు ఆహ్లాదకరమైన సంగీతాన్ని అందించడం ద్వారా వేసవిలో తీవ్రమైన వేడిని సమతుల్యం చేస్తుంది. చలికాలంలో కీచురాయి కూడా అదే పని చేస్తుంది.

One the Grasshopper and Cricket Summary in English

About Author

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 2 One the Grasshopper and Cricket 1

John Keats (31 October 1795 – 23 February 1821) was an English poet of the second generation of Romantic poets, with Lord Byron and Percy Bysshe Shelley, although his poems had been in publication for less than four years when he died of tuberculosis at the age of 25. They were indifferently received in his lifetime, but his fame grew rapidly after his death. The Encyclopaedia Britannica of 1888 called one ode “one of the final masterpieces”. Today his poems and letters remain among the most popular and analysed in English literature – in particular “Ode to a Nightingale”, “Ode on a Grecian Urn”, “Sleep and Poetry” and the sonnet “On First Looking into. Chapman’s Homer”.

The poem ‘On the Grasshopper and Cricket’ is written by John Keats in December 1816. It is a fine piece of Petrarchan Sonnet. It is inspired by the beauty of nature. It is about Nature and says that the poetry of earth never ceases the poet celebrates the music of the earth in this poem. He finds beauty in hot summer as well as in the cold winter. He Symbolizes the grasshopper as hot summer and the cricket as a very cold winter. He says that the music of nature or earth is always alive whether it is hot summer or cold winter.

Seasons may come and go. But nature never fails too inspire us with its songs. During the hot summer all the singing birds are tired and take rest under the shady branches of trees. They stop singing. But the song of nature goes on. We can still hear the voice of the grasshopper who runs from hedge to hedge. He sings endlessly and timelessly, and when tired, rests under some pleasant weed thus, the grasshopper carries on the duty of singing the everlasting song of nature. During summer, he is a fun loving and cheerful creature.

The poet further says that during the cold winter also the birds are silent. There is cutter silence on the frosty winter days. But the earth has its own way of expressing pleasure and joys. A cricket sings through the stones and breaks this silence. He sings from the stones but not from the trees. His songs appears to be increasingly the warmth every moment. People can hear it sitting in their houses. However, the poet says that to a person who is half sleep, it may appear to be a grasshoppers song coming from the grassy hills.

Thus, we can say that the grasshopper and the cricket perform a big responsibility. They carry on with nature’s continuous and everlasting music irrespective of the extreme climate. The poet has thus personified them. They are a symbol of constant joyous mood of nature. Hence the poem teaches us that we shall be joyful and pleasant no matter what the situations are in our life. With this attitude, we can easily over come all the obstacles in life.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 2 One the Grasshopper and Cricket

One the Grasshopper and Cricket Summary in Telugu

Note: This summary is only meant for Lesson Reference, not for examination purpose

“On the Grasshopper and Cricket” అను పద్య౦ జాన్ కీట్స్ చే 1816లో వ్రాయబడింది. ఇది పెట్రార్కన్ సొనెట్ యొక్క చక్కటి భాగం. ఇది ప్రకృతి అందంచే ప్రేరణపొందింది. ఇది ప్రకృతికి సంబంధించిన కావ్యం మరియు భూమి యొక్క కవిత్వం ఎప్పటికీ నిలిచిఉంటుంది ఆగిపోదని చెప్తుంది. కవి ఈ పద్య౦లో భూమి యొక్క సంగీతాన్ని గురించి గొప్పగా చెప్తున్నాడు. అతను తీవ్ర వేసవిలో మరియు చల్లని శీతాకాలంలో అందాన్ని చూస్తున్నాడు. అతను మిడతను వేడి వేసవిగా మరియు క్రికెట్ కీచురాయిని చాలా చల్లని శీతాకాలంగా సూచిస్తాడు. అది వేడి వేసవి లేదా చల్లని, తీవ్రమైన శీతాకాలమైనా, ప్రకృతి లేదా భూమి యొక్క సంగీతం ఎల్లప్పుడూ సజీవంగా ఉంటుందని చెప్తున్నాడు కవి.

ఋతువులు రావచ్చు మరియు పోవచ్చు. కానీ ప్రకృతిని పాటలతో మనల్ని ప్రేరేపించడంతో అది ఎప్పుడూ విఫలం కాదు. తీవ్ర వేసవి సమయంలో, పాడే పక్షులనీ అలిసిపోయి చెట్ల కొమ్మలో నీడ క్రింద విశ్రాంతి తీసుకుంటాయి. అవి పాడటం ఆపి వేస్తాయి. కానీ ప్రకృతి పాట మాత్రం కొనసాగుతుంది. కంచె నుండి కంచె వరకు పరిగెత్తుతూ పాడే మిడతగొంతు మనము ఇప్పటికీ వినగలము. ఇది అలసిపోకుండా మరియు నిరంతరం పాడుతూ మరియు అలసిపోయినప్పుడు ఒక సులభమైన కలుపు మెలికల క్రింద విశ్రాంతి తీసుకుంటాడు. ఈ విధంగా మిడత ప్రకృతి యొక్క శాశ్వతమైన పాటను పాడే బాధను నిర్వహిస్తుంది వేసవిలో, ఇది సరదాను ప్రేమించే మరియు ఉల్లాసంగా ఉండేవి.

చలికాలంలో కూడా పక్షులు మౌనంగా ఉంటాయి. కవి ఇంకా చెప్తాడు. అతిశీతలమైన శీతాకాలపు రోజులలో పూర్తిగా నిశ్శబ్దం. కానీ, భూమికి ఆనందం మరియు ఆక్రందాలను వ్యక్తీకరించడానికి దానికి స్వంతమార్గం ఉంది అంటున్నాడు. ఒక కీచురాయి రాళ్ళలో పాడుతూ ఈ నిశ్శబ్దాన్ని ఛేదిస్తుంది. ఇది చెట్లు నుండి కాదు, రాళ్ళ నుండి పాడుతోంది. అతని పాట ప్రతిక్షణం వెచ్చదనాన్ని పెంచుతుంది. జనం తమ ఇళ్ళలో కూర్చుని వినగలరు దీన్ని. ఏది ఏమైనప్పటికీ, సగం నిద్రలో ఉన్న వ్యక్తికి ఇది (గడ్డి కొండలు) పచ్చటి కొండల నుండి వచ్చే Grasshopper పాటగా కనిపిస్తుందని కవి చెప్తాడు.

అలా, మిడత మరియు కీచురాయి పెద్ద బాధ్యతను నిర్వర్తిస్తాయని మనం చెప్పగలం. వారు తీవ్రమైన వాతావరణాలతో సంబంధం లేకుండా ప్రకృతి యొక్క నిరంతర మరియు శాశ్వతమైన సంగీతాన్ని కొనసాగిస్తారు. కవి ఈ విధంగా వాటిని వ్యక్తీకరించాడు. అవి ప్రకృతి యొక్క స్థిరమైన ఆనందకరమైన స్థితికి చిహ్నం ప్రతీక. కాబట్టి జీవితంలో ఎలాంటి పరిస్థితులు ఎదురైనా మనం ఆనందంగా, ఆహ్లాదకరంగా ఉండమని ఈ పద్య౦ బోధిస్తుంది. ఈ వైఖరితో మనం జీవితంలోని అన్ని అడ్డంకులను అయినా సులభంగా అధిగమించవచ్చు. ఇది ఈ కావ్యం సందేశం.

One the Grasshopper and Cricket Summary in Hindi

Note: This summary is only meant for Lesson Reference, not for examination purpose

‘ऑन द ग्रासहोपर एंड क्रिकेट” नामक कविता दिसंबर 1816 में जॉन कीट्स द्वारा लिखा गया है । यह पेट्रार्चन सॉनेट की बेहतरीन रचना है । यह प्रकृति की सुंदरता से प्रेरित है। यह प्रकृति के बारे में है । कवि कहते हैं कि पृथ्वी की कविता कभी समाप्त नहीं होती । इस कविता में कवि पृथ्वी के संगीत का जश्न मनाते हैं। वे तपती गर्मी में तथा कड़ाके की ठंड में सुंदरता पाते हैं। वे टिड्डे को भीषण गर्मी और झींगुर को बहुत ठंडी सर्दी के रूप में दशति है। उनका कहना है कि प्रकृति या पृथ्वी का संगीत हमेशा जीवित रहता है, चाहे वह गर्मी हो या सर्दी ।

मैसम आ सकते हैं और जा सकते हैं। लेकिन प्रकृति अपने गीतों से हमें प्रेरित करन में कभी असफल नहीं होती है । तपती गरमी में सभी गानेवाले पक्षी थक जाते हैं और कृक्षों की शाखाओं के नीचे छाया में आराम लेते हैं । ने गाना बंद कर देते हैं । लेकिन प्रकृति का गाना जारी होता है । टिड्डे की आवाज हमें अभी भी सुनाई देती है, जो बाड़े से बाड़े तक दौड़ता है। वह लगातार और अथक जाता है और जब वह थक जाता है तब सुखद अपतृण के नीचे आराम लेता है । इस प्रकार टिड्डा प्रकृति का चिरस्थायी गीत गाने का कर्तव्य निभाता है । गर्मी के दौरान वह कौतुक – प्रिय और प्रमुदित प्राणी है ।

कवि आगे कहते हैं कि बहुत सर्दी के दौरान पक्षी खामोश होते हैं। वहत ठंडी सर्दियों के दिनों मे पूरी खानेशी होती है। लेकिन धरती को अपनी प्रसन्नता और हर्ष व्यक्त करने का तरीका है । झीर पत्थरों से गाता है और इस चुप्पी को तोड़ता है । वह पत्थरों से गाता है । न कि पेड़ों से । उसका गाना हर पल सरगर्मी और जोश बढ़ाता है । लोग अपने घर में बैठकर इसे सुन सकते हैं। हालाँकि, कवि कहते हैं कि जो व्यक्ति आधी नींद में है, उसे लगता है कि टिड्डे का गाना घास की पहाड़ियाँ से आता है ।

इस प्रकार, हम कह सकते हैं कि टिड्डा और झींगुर बड़ी जिम्मेदारी निभाते हैं । तीव्र जलवायु की परवाह किए बिना वे प्रकृति का निरंतर और चिरस्थायी संगीत जारी रखते हैं। इस प्रकार कवि ने उन्हें साकार किया । वे निरंतर खुशियों के प्रतीक हैं । इस दृष्ट से यह कविता हमें सिखाती है कि हमारी जिंदगी में चाहे जो भी परिस्थितियाँ हों, हमें हर्षित और सुखद होना चाहिए । इस दृष्टि कोण से हम जिंदगी में सभी बाधाएँ आसानी से पार कर सकते है |

Meanings and Explanations

grasshopper(n)/ (గ్రస్ హూప(ర్)/’gra:shɒp.ə(r)/ : A plant eating insect, మిడుత, पैधा खानेवाला एक कीड़ा

cricket(n)/ (క్రికెట్) / krɪk.ɪt : a small jumping insect that makes a loud sound, కీచురాయి, ज्यादा आवाज करने वाला छलाग मालनेवाला एक छोटा कीडा

faint(adj)/ (ఫెఇంట్)/ feɪnt : Feeling weak and tired, అలసిపోయిన, कमजोर और थका हुआ महसूस करना

hide (v)/ (హైడ్)/ haɪd : be behind; వెనుక, చాటున, నీడన ఉండు, छिपाना, छिपना

hedge (హెజ్)/hedʒ : a thick bush ; పొదల పరంపర

mown(v-pp)(ofmow)(మఉన్) / məʊn : Trionmed with a sharp blade or machine cut; కత్తిరించబడిన

mead(n) : Meadows; పచ్చిక బయలు , घास के मैदान

TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Chapter 2 One the Grasshopper and Cricket

new mown mead : Freshly cut grassland; కొత్తగా మట్టసమంగా కత్తిరించబడిన పచ్చిక బయలు, अभी – अभी काटा गया घास का मैदान

he has never done : ఆయన పని కొనసాగుతూనే ఉంటుంది అంతము, ముగింపు ఉండదు

delights(n-pl)(డిలైటెస్)/dɪlaɪt : Joys; సరదాలు, వినోదాలు, खुशियाँ

weed(n)/ (వీడ్)/ wi:d : wild plant; కలుపు మొక్క , जंगली पौधा

ceasing(v+ing)/ (సీసింగ్) /si:sın : stop; ముగిస్తున్న, रोकना

frost(n)/frost(ఫ్రోస్ట్)/ frɒst : a cover of ice particles; మంచు పొరలు, बर्फ

wrought(v-pp)(of work)/(రోట్) / rɔ:t : worked ; done ; చేసెను, पूरा करना

shrills(v-pre.ten)/(షి ల్ జ్) / ʃrɪlz : Comes through loud and clear, స్పష్టంగా పెద్దగా వస్తున్న

drowsiness(n) / (డ్రౌజినెస్)/’draʊ.zi.nəs: sleepiness; నిద్ర మత్తు, आधी नींद

TS Inter 2nd Year English Grammar Dialogue Writing

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year English Study Material Grammar Dialogue Writing Exercise Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Grammar Dialogue Writing

Q.No.20 (4 Marks)

A conversation is an informal spoken exchange of information, feelings, thoughts and ideas. It usually takes place among persons who know each other. Conversations use speech as the medium of language and are, therefore, spontaneous and unplanned.

A dialogue is a written piece of a conversation. It has, therefore, features of both speech and writing in it. Dialogue writing is a skill that helps us in developing both our speech and writing.

In a dialogue, speakers and listeners keep changing their roles. Dialogues can be very short or long. A dialogue need not always contain grammatically complete sentences. In informal style, we hardly ever use complete sentences.

For example,

A: Posted my letter?
B: Not yet.
It would be very artificial to have the same dialogue in complete sentences as:
A: Have you posted my letter ?
B: I have not posted it yet.

The levels of formality or informality in style depend on the topic, the purpose of communication and the relationship between the participants.

In dialogues, appropriateness is as -much necessary as correctness. A greeting, a question, a compliment are to be responded appropriately. Contracted forms like ‘i’m, it’S’, you’re’ etc are preferred in informal style.

Apart from responding appropriately to a compliment, it is also necessary to add some relevant information so that the dialogue is carried forward.

Look at the two examples of the same dialogue:

1. A: Your shirt is very nice.
B: Thanks for the compliment.

2. A: Your shirt is very nice.
B: Oh. I’m happy you like it. I bought it in Ahmedabad and it cost me only Rs. 190/-

A good dialogue has an element of surprise or shock. A dialogue must not be totally predictable.
Some useful tips to keep in mind:

  • The number of exchanges is to be a minimum of ten.
  • Greetings (opening and closing) are to be appropriate to the relationship between the speakers (For example : ‘Good morning’ to a teacher: ‘Hello’ to some elderly person and ‘Hal’ to a friend and no greeting at all to a member of the family.)
  • Dialogues to be brief; need not even be complete sentences.
    For example: The response to “Where are you going?” can be “To college”. You need not write “I am going to college.”
  • Depending on the relationship between the speakers, formal or informal language is to be used.
  • Use of linkers like ‘however’, ‘gap fillers like ‘mm’, polite expressions like ‘you’re right, but’ add to the good qualities of the given dialogue.
  • Keeping in view the given, topic for dialogue and the relationship between the speakers is most important.

Now observe the following examples carefully.

Dialogue between two friends who met at a shop:

Padmini : Hi Tripura!
Tripura : Hi Appi! How are you? Long time, no see.
Padmini : Well, rather busywith exams. And what’s the news at your end ?
Tripura : Nothing much. The same boring routine.
Padmini : Ok, then. I’ll get going. Bye.
Tripura : See you soon. Bye.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Grammar Dialogue Writing

Exercise

Observe the way the friends greet each other, how they say goodbye and the kind of language they use. Is the language the same as that which one uses in written English ?
Try to-spot any two ways in which.lt is different from written English. Now look at the following dialogue.
Answer:
Greetings : Hi
Taking Leave : Bye
No – It is not the same as that one used in written English. Two differences:

  1. contractions: I’llin the place of I will.
  2. incomplete sentences : I have been rather ‘busy with examinations. In its place -7 rather busy with exams.

Dialogue between a manager and a clerk:

Clerk : Good Morning, sir.
Manager : Good Morning. I see that you are late to work again.
Clerk Sir : I am sorry but I had some urgent work at home.
Manager : I’m getting tired of your excuses.
Clerk Sir : please excuse me. I will be on time from tomorrow.
Manager : This is the last warning. You can go to your desk now.
Clerk : Thank you, sir.

Excercise

i) How do the clerk and the manager begin and end the dialogue? What kind of language is used? How different is the language from written English ? Discuss.
Answer:
They begin with formal greetings (Good Morning) and end with formal leave taking (Thank you,’ sir). It is not much different from written English.

ii) If you compare the two pieces of dialogue given above, what do you notice ? Discuss whether” there are any similarities and differences and, if so, why?
Answer:
First dialogue uses informal style while the second one uses formal style.

Let’s now consider different types of situations.

1. Greeting
Informal: Hi, Neeta! Great to see you !/ Hi, Neeta! What a surprise! Hi, Neeta! How’re you?
Formal: Good morning; Ms Neeta! It is indeed a pleasure to see you.

2. Leave taking / farewell
Informal: Bye, See you soon! I Great seeing you. Bye! I Guess that’s all for now. Bye! – Formal: I must leave now. Good night, sir!/ It was a pleasure to have met you. Good day!

3. Asking a question
Informal: Hey! Quick question. Where’s Timbuktu ? I Hi, Renu! Know where Timbuktu is ?
Formal: Renuka, can you please tell me where Timbuktu is? I Renuka, I’m sorry to | bother you but could you tell me where Timbuktu is?

4. Giving an answer (to the above question) „
Informal: How the heck would I know? I Don’t know, don’t care/ No idea / Mali, West Africa.
Formal: I’m sorry, Meena, but I don’t know the answer. I Timbuktu is a city in Mali, West Africa.

5. Making a request
Informal: Hey, give me your book for a day? I Mohan, lend me your book for a day? (tone is one of rising inflexions)
Formal: Mohan, please lend me your book for a day./I would be obliged if you could ; lend me your book for a day. I Mohan, would you be kind enough to lend me your book for a day?

6. Making a suggestion
Informal: Coming for a walk ? I Let’s go for a walk.
Formal: I think it would be nice if we could go for a walk./ We can consider going for a walk.

7. Giving advice
Informal: Write neatly, you nitwit!/ Improve your writing, Uma.
Formal: Uma, I advise you to improve your writing’/ It would be nice if you could improve your writing, Uma.

TS Inter 2nd Year English Grammar Dialogue Writing

8. Offering an apology
Informal: Sorry it broke. I Awfully sorry I broke the plate.
Formal: I apologise for breaking the plate. II am extremely sorry for having broken the plate.

9. Expressing gratitude’
Informal: Thanks Partha, for the pen.

Formal: Thank you so much for the pen./ It was indeed nice of you, Parthasarathy, to have given me the pen.
Given below are some dialogues depicting what people might say in situations they encounter in their day-to-day life. Study them and observe the use of formal and informal language, abbreviations, tone and flow of ideas.

Observe the following Model Dialogues:

Dialogue between two newcomers to the college

Suresh : Hello, I think you are a newcomer to this college.
Praveen : Yes, you are right. I am Praveen.
Suresh : Oh, I am Suresh. I am also a newcomer.
Praveen : Nice to meet you. How are you?
Suresh : I am fine and you ?
Praveen : I’m fine; may I know why you have chosen this college?
Suresh : This college is supposed to be the best college in our town.
Praveen : You are right, Suresh. The academic system of this college is quite up to date, I hope Can we go to the class now?
Suresh : Sure, let’s go there.
Praveen : Here we are.

Dialogue between a teacher and a student

Student : Sir, good morning.
Teacher : Good morning, why were you absent yester -day?
Student : Sir, my brother was suffering from a fever. I went to see him.
Teacher : How is he now? What did the doctor say?
Student : He has to take rest.
Teacher : When your brother comes back, I want to talk to him.
Student : Sure, sir. Thank you sir.

Dialogue between father and son

Father : You have appeared for the Class XII exams
What are your plans for the future?
Son : I haven’t decided so far, dad.
Father : Don’t you feel ashamed of yourself. You should have decided your goal in life.
Son : I would like to join UG course in any ope of the reputed colleges in India.
Father : What’s your long-term goal?
Son : I want to become an actor
Father : Are you sure you want to take it as your profession?
Son : Yes, dad
Father : Ok, be serious and decide a suitable career for yourself.

Dialogue between a bookseller and customer

Bookseller : Good morning. How can I help you?
Customer : Good morning, I want to buy a few books. .
Bookseller : There are different kinds of books here. What kind of books do you want?
Customer : I want William Shakespeare’s Hamlet and R.K. Narayan’ The Guide.
Bookseller : We have R.K. Narayan’s The Guide. Sorry to say that Shakespeare’s books are out of stock,
Customer : When do you get the books?
Bookseller : Sir, next Monday.
Customer : 0k, thank you.
Bookseller : Do you want any other books?
Customer : No, thanks. How much do I have to pay for this?
Bookseller : 150 rupees, sir. We have given you 10% discount.
Customer : Thanks. Here is your payment.
Bookseller : Thanks for coming.

Dialogue between a passenger and a booking clerk .

Clerk : Good morning! How can I help you?
Passenger : I want to reserve four berths to Chennai on KCG Express.
Clerk : Have you filled the reservation form?
Passenger : Sir, here it is!
Clerk : Since it is festival season, there ¡s no seat available on 14 and 15 January.
Passenger : Oh, is that so Is there any seat available on Chennal Express?
Clerk : Yes. There are four seats available.
Passenger : Thank you sir. Please get me those four tickets.
Clerk : Welcome.

Complete the following dialogue between a girl and her mother.

Mother : I want to teach you how to cook ladies’ fingers curry today.
Daughter : No, mom. I have some work today, I am planning to go out.
Mother : a) __________
Daughter : Yesm mom. I was busy last week.
Mother : b) _______
Daughter : Is it compulsory to learn cooking?
Mother : c) _______
Daughter : Ok, mom. I go out and come back within an hour. Then I would learn.
Mother : d) ________
Daughter : Thank you mom.
Answer:
a) You said the same last week also.
b) But, when will you learn cooking at least a few items?
c) Absolutely. We need food and we cannot always depend on others.
d) That’s nice! That’s the spirit!

Exercises

Question 1.
Write a dialogue between two friends on the choice of career. (Revision Test – V)
Answer:
BETWEEN TWO FRIENDS:
Pavani : Hi, Sudha! What do you want to do after Intermediate?
Sudha : Hi, Vani! We are in MPC group. And our automatic choice is Engineering. The only thing to decide is which branch and which college. Do you have any other ideas?
Pavani : Yes. I’m not interested in Engineering.
Sudha : Very surprising I What else will you do ?.
Pavani : I’ll pursue B.Sc., course.
Sudha : Are you mad? Joining B.Sc., ?
Pavani : Why are you so excited? I just love Physics. I want to join B.Sc., now and then M.Sc., Physics. Later I want togo for research in Physics, particularly in Nanotechnology.
Sudha : Really, stunning! I don’t know anything about other options. All these days I’ve been under the impression that M.P.C in Intermediate means Engineering afterwards.
Pavani : There are lot many other options Sudha! You can consult any lecturer, or go through ‘education pages’ of newspapers or even browse the internet. Plenty of courses are available. We have to select the one that we are really interested in.
Sudha : Thank you Vani. You’ve really opened my eyes. That too, at the right time. I’ll follow your guidelines. Bye!

TS Inter 2nd Year English Grammar Dialogue Writing

Question 2.
Prepare a dialogue between yourself and your father discussing the secrets of success in business.
Answer:
Father : Where are you going Ajith?
Sai : Not particular, dad. Just like that.
Father : Hey, Ajith! It’s time you started picking up a lesson or two in running businesses.
Sai : I’ll certainly dad. Ever ready. Will you tell me one today ?
Father : Wonderful! Remember that two traits are very important to succeed in business.
Sai : Mm. Yes! What are they ?
Father : Honesty and wisdom.
Sai : Great. Then wisdom jneans!
Father : Never make such promises !
Sai : Dad! Stunning!

Question 3.
Imagine you got the first rank in the intermediate first year. Your close friend came to congratulate you. How do you share your experience with him? Write a dialogue between you and your friend. (Model Question Paper)
Answer:
Varun : Hi, Avinash. Welcome
Avinash : Hi, Akshay. Heartiest congratulations to you on securing the first rank.
Varun : Thank you!
Avinash : Welcome. You did work very hard and deserve such honours.
Varun : Not exactly hard work Avinash. Just smart work.
Avinash : What do you mean ?
Varun : Yes. I used to attend classes with prior preparation on the topic being discussed. That ensured my concentration. And I made notes of the topics discussed at the end of the day. That made revision easy. That never took much time. I used to pursue my hobbies. I found time for leisure activities, social relations
Avinash : Hey, that sounds great. It’s like a cakewalk. Then I’ll follow your example.
Varun : That’d be fine. You are always welcome. Bye for now.
Avinash : Thanks a bunch. Bye!

TS Inter 2nd Year English Grammar Dialogue Writing

Question 4.
You are working in ABCD Company. Ask your employer to enhance your salary from the next month. Write a dialogue between you and your employer.
Answer:
You : Good morning, sir.
Manager : Good morning, yes?
You : Sir, a humble submission. It’s three years since I had my last hike in my salary.
Manager : Yes, you’re right. Our company had tough times.
You : Yes, sir. But the cost of living has been going up. It’s really difficult to manage without a hike you from next month onwards.
Manager : Yes. We do really understand your difficulties. We are pooling our resources to hike salaries from the next month.
You : Thank you so much sir. Bye
Manager : You’re welcome. Bye!

Question 5.
Build a dialogue between a salesman and a’ customer who has sold a defective apparel. (Model Question Paper)
Answer:
Salesman : Good evening sir! How may I help you?
Customer : Good evening! This is the shirt I bought from you two days ago. And here is the bill.
Salesman : No need to show the bill sir. Any problem?
Customer : Yes, no buttons. And the sleeve’s are too loosely stitched.
Salesman : I’m very sorry sir. I’ll at once replace it with a new one.
Customer : But why this defective shirt? Lot of inconvenience and embarrassment.
Salesmam : I regret it very much sir. Normally our quality check is very stringent sir. I don’t know how this defective piece has reached here. Sorry once again sir. Here is the new shirt.
Customer : Thank you. But make sure such things don’t happen.
Salesman : Sure sir. Thank you.

Question 6.
As a student, you would like to open an account in the nearby State Bank of india. Write a conversation between you and an SBI bank manager about opening a savings bank account
Answer:
You : Good morning sir.
Manager : Good morning! How may I help you?
You : I would like to open a saving bank account here, sir.
Manager : Have you got your Aadhaar and PAN card?
You : Yes sir. I have brought attested copies and originals too.
Manager : Then, fill in this form correctly and completely. Enclose copies of those two documents. Deposit an amount of Rs two thousand in the cash counter. Hand over the receipt and filled in form to our Ass. Manager.
You : Thank you sir.
Manger : Welcome.
You : Sir, can I have the passbook and ATM card today?
Manager : No. You can get your passbook in a day or two. But, for ATM card you will have to apply later.
You : Right sir. Bye!
Manager : Bye.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
1 & 2 \\
3 & 4
\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
3 & 8 \\
7 & 2
\end{array}\right]\) and 2X + A = B, then find X. [Mar. 15 (AP); Mar. 13, 11; May 12]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 1

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
3 & 2 & -1 \\
2 & -2 & 0 \\
1 & 3 & 1
\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-3 & -1 & 0 \\
2 & 1 & 3 \\
4 & -1 & 2
\end{array}\right]\) and X = A + B then find X. [Mar. 17 (TS)]
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
0 & 1 & -1 \\
4 & -1 & 3 \\
5 & 2 & 3
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 2.
If \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
x-3 & 2 y-8 \\
z+2 & 6
\end{array}\right]\) = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
5 & 2 \\
-2 & a-4
\end{array}\right]\), then find the values of x, y, z and a. [May 14, 06 Mar. 19(AP)]
Answer:
Given \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
x-3 & 2 y-8 \\
z+2 & 6
\end{array}\right]\) = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
5 & 2 \\
-2 & a-4
\end{array}\right]\)
From the equality of matrices,
x – 3 = 5
⇒ x = 8
2y – 8 = 2
2y = 10
y=5
z + 2 = – 2
z = – 4
a – 4 = 6
a = 10
∴ x = 8, y = 5, z = – 4, a = 10

If \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
x-1 & 2 & 5-y \\
0 & z-1 & 7 \\
1 & 0 & a-5
\end{array}\right]\) = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 2 & 3 \\
0 & 4 & 7 \\
1 & 0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\) then find the values of x, y, z and ‘a’.
Answer:
2, 2, 5, 5

If \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
x-1 & 2 & y-5 \\
z & 0 & 2 \\
1 & -1 & 1+a
\end{array}\right]\) = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1-x & 2 & -y \\
2 & 0 & 2 \\
1 & -1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) then find the values of x, y, z and ‘a’.
Answer:
1, \(\frac{5}{2}\), 2, 0

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 3.
Find the trace of \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & 3 & -5 \\
2 & -1 & 5 \\
2 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & 3 & -5 \\
2 & -1 & 5 \\
2 & 0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)
∴ Tra A = 1 – 1 + 1 = 1
The elements of the principal diagonal = 1, – 1, 1

Fin the area of A if A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & 2 & -1 / 2 \\
0 & -1 & 2 \\
-1 / 2 & 2 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
1

Question 4.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 2 & 3 \\
3 & 2 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
3 & 2 & 1 \\
1 & 2 & 3
\end{array}\right]\), find 3B – 2A. [Mar, 19 (TS); Mar. 12]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 2

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
0 & 1 & 2 \\
2 & 3 & 4 \\
4 & 5 & -6
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-1 & 2 & 3 \\
0 & 1 & 0 \\
0 & 0 & -1
\end{array}\right]\) find B – A and 4A – 5B
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-1 & 1 & 1 \\
-2 & -2 & -4 \\
-4 & -5 & -5
\end{array}\right],\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
5 & -6 & -7 \\
8 & 7 & 16 \\
16 & 20 & -19
\end{array}\right]\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 1 & 2 \\
2 & 3 & 4 \\
4 & 5 & 6
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & -2 & 0 \\
0 & 1 & -1 \\
-1 & 0 & 3
\end{array}\right]\) find A – B and 4B – 3A
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-1 & 3 & 2 \\
2 & 2 & 5 \\
5 & 5 & 3
\end{array}\right],\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
4 & -11 & -6 \\
-6 & -5 & -16 \\
-16 & -15 & -6
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 5.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & -2 & 3 \\
2 & 3 & -1 \\
-3 & 1 & 2
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 0 & 2 \\
0 & 1 & 2 \\
1 & 2 & 0
\end{array}\right]\) then examine whether A and B commute with respect to multiplication of matrices. [Nov, 98]
Answer:
Given A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & -2 & 3 \\
2 & 3 & -1 \\
-3 & 1 & 2
\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 0 & 2 \\
0 & 1 & 2 \\
1 & 2 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)
Both A and B are square matrices of order 3.
Hence both AB and BA are defined and are matrices of order 3.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 3
which shows that AB ≠ BA
Therefore A and B do not commute with respect to multiplication of matrices.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & -2 & 3 \\
-4 & 2 & 5
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
2 & 3 \\
4 & 5 \\
2 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) do AB and BA exist ? If they exist find them. Do A and B commute with respect to multiplication.
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
0 & -4 \\
10 & 3
\end{array}\right]\), \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-10 & 2 & 21 \\
-16 & 2 & 37 \\
-2 & -2 & 11
\end{array}\right]\) & AB ≠BA

Question 6.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\mathbf{i} & 0 \\
0 & -\mathbf{i}
\end{array}\right]\), then show that A2 = – 1. [Mar. 16 (AP), 08]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 4

Find A2 where A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
4 & 2 \\
-1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
14 & 10 \\
-5 & -1
\end{array}\right]\)

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
\mathbf{i} & \mathbf{0} \\
\mathbf{0} & \mathbf{i}
\end{array}\right]\), find A2.
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
-1 & 0 \\
0 & -1
\end{array}\right]\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 7.
Find \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\mathbf{0} & \mathbf{c} & -\mathbf{b} \\
-\mathbf{c} & \mathbf{0} & \mathbf{a} \\
\mathbf{b} & -\mathbf{a} & \mathbf{0}
\end{array}\right]\) \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
\mathbf{a}^2 & \mathbf{a b} & \mathbf{a c} \\
\mathbf{a b} & \mathbf{b}^2 & \mathbf{b c} \\
\mathbf{a c} & \mathbf{b c} & \mathbf{c}^2
\end{array}\right]\) [Mar. 96; May 91]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
\mathbf{0} & \mathbf{c} & -\mathbf{b} \\
-\mathbf{c} & \mathbf{0} & \mathbf{a} \\
\mathbf{b} & -\mathbf{a} & \mathbf{0}
\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
\mathbf{a}^2 & \mathbf{a b} & \mathbf{a c} \\
\mathbf{a b} & \mathbf{b}^2 & \mathbf{b c} \\
\mathbf{a c} & \mathbf{b c} & \mathbf{c}^2
\end{array}\right]\)
The order of matrix, A is 3 × 3
The order of matrix, B is 3 × 3
The no. of columns in A = The no. of rows in B.
∴ AB is defined.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 5

Question 8.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
2 & 4 \\
-1 & k
\end{array}\right]\) and A2 = 0, then find the value of k. [Mar. 17 (AP), 14, 05, May. 11, Mar. 08(TS)]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 6
From equality of matrices, – 2 – k = 0 ⇒ k = – 2

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 9.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
3 & 0 & 0 \\
0 & 3 & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 3
\end{array}\right]\) then find A4. [May 01]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 7

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & 1 & 3 \\
5 & 2 & 6 \\
-2 & -1 & -3
\end{array}\right]\) then find A3.
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 0 & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 0 \\
0 & 0 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 10.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 4 & 7 \\
2 & 5 & 8
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
-3 & 4 & 0 \\
4 & -2 & -1
\end{array}\right]\), then show that (A + B)’ = A’ + B’ [May. 09]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 8

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 11.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
-2 & 1 & 0 \\
3 & 4 & -5
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
1 & 2 \\
4 & 3 \\
-1 & 5
\end{array}\right]\), then find A + B’. [May. 08]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 9

Question 12.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
2 & -1 & 2 \\
1 & 3 & -4
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
1 & -2 \\
-3 & 0 \\
5 & 4
\end{array}\right]\), then verify that (AB)’ = B’A’ [Mar. 13]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 10

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 13.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
2 & 0 & 1 \\
-1 & 1 & 5
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
-1 & 1 & 0 \\
0 & 1 & -2
\end{array}\right]\), then find (AB)’. [Mar. 19 (TS); May. 12]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 11

Question 14.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
-2 & 1 \\
5 & 0 \\
-1 & 4
\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
-2 & 3 & 1 \\
4 & 0 & 2
\end{array}\right]\) then find 2A + B’ and 3B’ – A. [Mar. 10]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 12

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 15.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
2 & -4 \\
-5 & 3
\end{array}\right]\), then find A + A’ and AA’ [May 15 (AP); May 07, 02]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 13

If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
-1 & 2 \\
0 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) then find AA’. Do A and A’ commute with respect to multiplication of matrices ? [Mar. 17(TS)]
Answer:
AA’ = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
5 & 2 \\
2 & 1
\end{array}\right]\), A’A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
1 & -2 \\
-2 & 5
\end{array}\right]\); AA’ ≠ A’A

Question 16.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
0 & 4 & -2 \\
-4 & 0 & 8 \\
2 & -8 & x
\end{array}\right]\) is a skew symmetric matrix, find the value of x. [Mar. 08]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 14

Question 17.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
-1 & 2 & 3 \\
2 & 5 & 6 \\
3 & x & 7
\end{array}\right]\) is a symmetric matrix, then find x. [Mar. 16 (AP), 05, 03, May. 15 (TS)]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 15
From equality of matrices, x = 6.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 18.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
0 & 2 & 1 \\
-2 & 0 & -2 \\
-1 & x & 0
\end{array}\right]\) is a skew symmetric matrix, then find x. [May. 14, 13, 11]
Answer:
A matrix A is said to be skew symmetric if,
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 16
From the equality of matrices, x = 2.
∴ x = 2

Question 19.
Is \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
0 & 1 & 4 \\
-1 & 0 & 7 \\
-4 & -7 & 0
\end{array}\right]\) symmetric or skew symmetric? [Mar. 09]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 17
∴ A is a skew symmetric matrix since AT = – A.

Question 20.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\cos \alpha & \sin \alpha \\
-\sin \alpha & \cos \alpha
\end{array}\right]\), show that AA’ = A’A = I. [Mar. 07]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 18

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 21.
If ω is complex (non real) cube root of 1, then show that \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & \omega & \omega^2 \\
\omega & \omega^2 & 1 \\
\omega^2 & 1 & \omega
\end{array}\right|\) = 0 [Mar. 14, 11; May. 92]
Answer:
1, ω, ω2 are the cube roots of unity.
Then, 1 + ω + ω2 = 0, ω3 = 1.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 19

Question 22.
Find the determinant of the matrix. [May. 95]
\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 0 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 0 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 0
\end{array}\right]\)
det A = \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}
0 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 0 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 0
\end{array}\right|\) = 0(0 – 1) – 1 (0 – 1) + 1(1 – 0)
= 0(- 1) – 1 (- 1) + 1(1) = 0 + 1 + 1 = 2

Find the determinant of the matrix
\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
\mathbf{a} & \mathbf{h} & \mathbf{g} \\
\mathbf{h} & \mathbf{b} & \mathbf{f} \\
\mathbf{g} & \mathbf{f} & \mathbf{c}
\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
abc + 2fgh – af2 – bg2 – ch2

Find the determinant of the matrix
\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
\mathbf{a} & \mathbf{b} & \mathbf{c} \\
\mathbf{b} & \mathbf{c} & \mathbf{a} \\
\mathbf{c} & \mathbf{a} & \mathbf{b}
\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
3abc – a3 – b3 – c3

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 23.
Find the determinant of the matrix \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1^2 & 2^2 & 3^2 \\
2^2 & 3^2 & 4^2 \\
3^2 & 4^2 & 5^2
\end{array}\right]\). [Mar. 10]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1^2 & 2^2 & 3^2 \\
2^2 & 3^2 & 4^2 \\
3^2 & 4^2 & 5^2
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}
1 & 4 & 9 \\
4 & 9 & 16 \\
9 & 16 & 25
\end{array}\right]\)
det A = 1(225 – 256) – 4 (100 – 144) + 9 (64 – 81)
= – 31 + 176 – 153
= 176 – 184 = – 8.

Question 24.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & 0 & 0 \\
2 & 3 & 4 \\
5 & -6 & x
\end{array}\right]\) and det A = 45, then find x. [May 09, 03, 99, 96, Mar; 07, 03]
Answer:
Given A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}
1 & 0 & 0 \\
2 & 3 & 4 \\
5 & -6 & \mathrm{x}
\end{array}\right]\) and det A = 45.
det A = 1 (3x + 24) – 0(2x – 20) + 0 (-12 – 15) = 3x + 24 – 0 + 0 = 3x + 24
Given, det A = 45 ⇒ 3x + 24 = 45 ⇒ 3x = 45 – 24 ⇒ 3x = 21 ⇒ x = 7.

Question 25.
Find the adjoint and inverse of the matrix \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
2 & -3 \\
4 & 6
\end{array}\right]\). [Mar. 12]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}
2 & -3 \\
4 & 6
\end{array}\right]\)
Cofactor of 2 is A1 = + (6) = 6
Cofactor of 4 is A2 = – (- 3) = 3
Cofactor of – 3 is B1 = – (4) = – 4
Cofactor of 6 is B2 = + (2) = 2
∴ Cofactor matrix of A is B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
\mathrm{A}_1 & \mathrm{~B}_1 \\
\mathrm{~A}_2 & \mathrm{~B}_2
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{cc}
6 & -4 \\
3 & 2
\end{array}\right]\)
Adj A = B’ = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
6 & 3 \\
-4 & 2
\end{array}\right]\)
det A = ad – bc = 12 – (- 12) = 12 + 12 = 24 ≠ 0
∴ A is invertiable.
A-1 = \(\frac{{adj} A}{{det} A}=\frac{1}{24}\left[\begin{array}{rr}
6 & 3 \\
-4 & 2
\end{array}\right]\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Find the adjoint and the Inverse of the matrix A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
1 & 2 \\
3 & -5
\end{array}\right]\). [Mar. 18 (AP); May 06]
Answer:
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
-5 & -2 \\
-3 & 1
\end{array}\right],\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\frac{5}{11} & \frac{2}{11} \\
\frac{3}{11} & \frac{-1}{11}
\end{array}\right]\)

Question 26.
Find the adjoint and inverse of the matrix A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\cos \alpha & -\sin \alpha \\
\sin \alpha & \cos \alpha
\end{array}\right]\) [Mar. 13, 09]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}
\cos \alpha & -\sin \alpha \\
\sin \alpha & \cos \alpha
\end{array}\right]\)

Cofactor of cos α is A1 = + (cos α) = cos α
Cofactor of sin α is A2 = – (- sin α) = sin α
Cofactor of – sin α is B1 = – (sin α) = – sin α
Cofactor of cos α is B2 = + (cos α) = cos
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Matrices Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 20

Question 27.
Find the rank of the matrix\(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\). [Mar. 18 (TS); May 10; Mar. 08]
Answer:
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}
1 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 1 \\
1 & 1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\)
det A = 1(1 – 1) – 1(1 – 1) + 1 (1 – 1) = 0 – 0 + 0 = 0
Since det A = 0, Rank [A] ≠ 3
Now, \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}
1 & 1 \\
1 & 1
\end{array}\right]\) is a submatrix of A, whose determinant is 1 – 1 = 0 ∴ Rank [A] ≠ 2.
Now. [1] is a submatrix of A, whose determinant is 1 ≠ 0. ∴ Rank [A] = 1

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 10th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Solids Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 10th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Solids

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
State Hooke’s law of elasticity.
Answer:
Hooke’s law states that within elastic limit stress is proportional to strain.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 1
This constant is known as elastic modulus of the body.

Question 2.
State the units and dimensions of stress.
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 2
Dimensional formula ML-1 T-2

Question 3.
State the units and dimensions of modulus of elasticity.
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 3
Nm-2 (or) pascal
Dimensional formula ML-1 T-2

Question 4.
State the units and dimensions of Young’s modulus.
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 4
Dimensional formula ML-1

Question 5.
State the units and dimensions of modulus of rigidity.
Answer:
Modulus of rigidity,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 5
(or) pascal
Dimensional formula ML-1T².

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 6.
State the units and dimensions of Bulk modulus.
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 6
unit is Nm-2 (or) pascal
Dimensional formula ML-1 T-2

Question 7.
State the examples of nearly perfect elastic and plastic bodies.
Answer:
There is no perfectly elastic body. But behaviour of Quartz fiber is very nearer to perfectly elastic body.

Real bodies are not perfectly plastic, but behaviour of wet clay, butter etc., can be taken as examples for perfectly plastic bodies.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define Hooke’s law of elasticity, proportionality, permanent set, and breaking stress.
Answer:
Hooke’s Law :
It states that within elastic limit, stress is proportional to strain.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 7
This constant is called elastic constant (E).
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 8

Proportionality limit:
When load is increased the elongation of the wire will also increases. The maximum load upto which the elongation is directly proportional to the load is called proportionality limit (A). The graph drawn between load and extension. It is a straight line OA’.

Permanent set :
If the load on the wire is increased beyond elastic limit, the elongation is not pro portional to load. On removal of the load the wire cannot regain its original length. The length of the wire increases permanently. In figure permanent set is given by OP. This is called permanent set.

Breaking stress :
If the load is increased beyond yield point the elongation is very rapid, even for small changes in load and wire becomes thinner and breaks. This is shown as E. The breaking force per unit area is called breaking stress.

Question 2.
Define modulus of elasticity, stress, strain and Poisson’s ratio.
Answer:
1) Stress:
Restoring force acting on unit area is called stress.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 9
Unit: N/m² (or) pascal;
Dimensional formula: ML-1T-2.

2) Strain :
The change in dimension per unit original dimension of a body is called strain.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 10
It is a ratio, so no units and dimensional formula.

3) Modulus of elasticity :
∴ From Hooke’s Law Stress x Strain or
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 11
The ratio of stress to strain is called modulus of elasticity.
Unit: N/m².
Dimensional formula: ML-1T-2.

4) Poisson’s ratio :
It is defined as the ratio of lateral contraction strain to longitudinal elongation strain.
Poisson’s ratio
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 12
It is a ratio, so no units and dimensional formula.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 3.
Define Young’s modulus, Bulk modulus, and Shear modulus.
Answer:
1) Young’s Modulus Y:
Within elastic limit, the ratio of longitudinal stress to longitudinal strain is called Young’s modulus
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 13

2. Bulk Modulus (B) :
Within elastic limit, the ratio of volumetric stress to volumetric strain is called Bulk modulus
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 14

3) Shear Modulus or Rigidity Modulus (G):
Within elastic limit, the ratio of tangential or shearing stress to shearing strain is called Shear modulus or Rigidity modulus.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 15

Question 4.
Define stress and explain the types of stress. [AP War. 19; TS War. 16]
Answer:
Stress:
When a body is subjected to a deforming force, then restoring forces will develop inside the body. These restoring forces will oppose any sort of change in its original shape. The restoring force per unit area of the surface is called stress.

Stress:
Stress is defined as force applied per unit area.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 16
D.F. = ML-1T-2 ; Unit: N/m² (or) Pascal.

Types of stress :
It is of three types. They are : 1) Longitudinal stress 2) Tangential stress (or) Shear stress 3) Volumetric stress.

Longitudinal stress:
If the force applied on a body is along its lengthwise direction then it is called longitudinal stress. It produces deformation in length.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 17

Tangential stress (or) Shear stress:
Force applied per unit area parallel to the surface of a body trying to displace the upper layers of the body is called shearing stress.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 18
(Parallel to the surface layers)

Volumetric stress:
If force is applied on all the sides of a body or on the volume of a body then it is called volumetric stress.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 19

Question 5.
Define strain and explain the types of strain.
Answer:
Strain:
Strain is defined as deformation produced per unit dimension. It is a ratio. So no units.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 20

Types of strain :
Strain is of three types. They are: 1) Longitudinal strain 2) Tangential strain or Shear strain 3) Volumetric strain.

Longitudinal strain:
The ratio of elongation to original length along length wise direction is defined as longitudinal strain.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 21

Shearing strain :
If the force applied on a body produces a change in shape only it is called shearing force. The angle through which a plane originally perpendicular to the fixed surface shifts due to the application of shearing stress is called shearing strain or simply shear (θ).
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 22

Question 6.
Define strain energy and derive the equation for the same. [TS Mar. ’19; May ’18; AP Mar. ’14; May ’14]
Answer:
Strain energy :
The energy developed in (string) a body when it is strained is called strain energy.

Let a force F be applied on lower end of wire, fixed at the upper end. Let the extension be dl.
∴ Work done = dW = Fdl
Total work done in stretching it from 0
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 23

Question 7.
Explain why steel is preferred to copper, brass, aluminium in heavy-duty machines and in structural designs.
Answer:
For metals Young’s moduli are large. Therefore, these materials require a large force to produce small change in length. To increase the length of a thin steel wire of 0.1 cm² cross-sectional area by 0.1 %, a force of 2000 N is required. The force required to produce the same strain in aluminium, brass, and copper wire having the same cross-sectional area are 690 N, 900N, and 1100 N respectively. It means that steel is more elastic than copper, brass, and aluminium. It is for this reason that steel is preferred in heavy duty machines and in structural designs.

Question 8.
Describe the behaviour of a wire under gradually increasing load. [AP Mar. ’18, ’17, ’16, ’15, ’13, May ’16, ’13; TS Mar. 18, 17, 15; May 17,16; June 15]
Answer:
Behaviour of a wire under increasing load:
Let a wire is suspended at one end and loads are attached to the other end. When loads are gradually increased the following changes are noticed.

1) Proportionality limit (A) :
When load is increased the elongation of the wire gradually increases. The maximum load upto which the elongation is directly pro-portional to the load is called proportionality limit (A). The graph drawn between load and extension is a straight line. So point A is called proportionality limit. In this region Hooke’s Law is obeyed.

2) Elastic limit (B):
If the load is increased above the proportionality limit the elongation is not proportional to the load. Hooke’s law is not obeyed. But it exhibits elasticity which means that it regains the original length if load is removed. The maximum load on the wire upto which it exhibits elasticity is called elastic limit (B in the graph).
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 24

3) Permanent set (C) :
If the load on the wire is increased beyond elastic limit say upto C, the elongation is not proportional to load. On removal of the load, the wire does not regain its original length. Length of wire increases perma-nently. In figure permanent set is given by OP. So OP is called permanent set.

4) Point of ultimate tensile strength (D) :
If the load is further increased, upto D’ then strain increases rapidly even though there is no increase in stress.

At this stage the restoring forces seems to be subdued to then deforming forces. Elongation without increase in load is called creeping. This behaviour of metal is called yielding.

5) Fracture point (E) :
If the load is increased beyond Yield point the elongation is very rapid, even for small changes in load the wire becomes thinner and breaks. This is shown as E. The breaking force per unit area is called breaking stress.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 9.
Two identical solid balls, one of ivory and the other of wet clay are dropped from the same height on to the floor. Which one will rise to a greater height after striking the floor and why?
Answer:
We know that ivory ball is more elastic than wet-clay ball. Therefore, the ivory ball will tend to regain its original shape in a very short time after the collision. Due to it, there will be large energy and momentum transfer to the ivory ball in comparison to the wet-clay ball. As a result of it, the ivory ball will raise higher after the collision.

Question 10.
While constructing buildings and bridges a pillar with distributed ends is preferred to a pillar with rounded ends. Why?
Answer:
Use of pillars or columns is very common in buildings and bridges. A pillar with roun-ded-ends supports less load than that with a distributed shape at the ends. Hence, for this reason, while constructing buildings and bridges a pillar with distributed ends is preferred to a pillar with rounded ends.

Question 11.
Explain why the maximum height of a mountain on earth is approximately 10 km?
Answer:
A mountain base is not under uniform compression and this provides some shearing stress to the rocks under which they can flow. The stress due to all the material on the top should be less than the critical shearing stress at which the rocks flow.

At the bottom of a mountain of height ‘h’, the force per unit area due to the weight of the mountain is hpg where p is the density of the material of the mountain and g is the acceleration due to gravity. The material at the bottom experiences this force in the vertical direction and the sides of the mountain are free. There is a shear component, approximately hpg itself. Now the elastic limit for a typical rock is 3 × 107 Nm-2. Equating this to hpg with ρ = 3 × 10³ kg m-3 gives
h = \(\frac{30\times10^{-7}}{3\times10^3\times10}\) = 10 km
Hence, the maximum height of a mountain on earth is approximately 10 km.

Question 12.
Explain the concept of Elastic Potential Energy in a stretched wire and hence obtain the expression for it. [AP May ’ 18, 17; AP June 15]
Answer:
When a wire is put under a tensile stress, work is done against the inter atomic forces. This work is stored in the form of “Elastic potential energy.”

Expression to elastic potential energy:
To stretch a wire, force is applied. As a result it elongates. So the force applied is useful to do some work. This work is stored in it as potential energy. When the deforming force is removed, this energy is liberated as heat. The energy developed in a body (string) when it is strained is called strain energy.

Let a force F be applied on a wire fixed at the upper end. Let the extension be dl.
∴ Work done = dW = Fdl
Total work done in stretching from
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 25

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define Hooke’s law of elasticity and describe an experiment to determine the Young’s modulus of the material of a wire.
Answer:
Hooke’s Law :
Within elastic limit, stress is directly proportional to strain.
strain ∝ stress
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 26
where E constant called modulus of elasticity of the material of a body.

Determination of Young’s modulus of a wire:
The apparatus used to find Young s modulus of a wire consists of two long wires A and B of same length made with same material are used. These two wires are suspended from a rigid support and a vernier scale V’ is attached to them. Wire A is connected to the main scale (M). A fixed load is connected to this cord to keep tension in the wire. This is called reference wire. The second Wire B’ is connected to vernier scale V’. Adjustable load hanger is connected to this wire. This is called experimental wire.

Procedure :
Let a load M1 is attached to the weight hanger at vernier. Main scale reading (M.S.R) and vernier scale reading (V.S.R) are noted. Weights are gradually increased in the steps of \(\frac{1}{2}\) kg upto a maximum load of say 3 kg. Every time M.S.R and V.S.R are noted. They are placed in tabular form.

Now loads are gradually decreased in steps of \(\frac{1}{2}\) kg. While decreasing M.S.R and V.S.R are noted for every load, values are posted in tabular form.

Let 1st reading with mass M1 is e1 and 2nd reading with mass M2 is e2.

Change in load M = M2 – M1
elongation e = e2 – e1
‘M’ and ‘e’ values are calculated and a graph is plotted.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 27

Force on the wire = mg
Area of cross section of the wire = πr²
(r = radius of the wire)
Elongation = e
Original length = l
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 28

A graph is between load (m) and elongation ‘e’, is straight line passing through the origin. The slope of the graph (tan θ) gives (\(\frac{m}{e}\)). The value is substituted in the above equation to find Young’s modulus of the material of the wire.

Precautions:

  1. The load applied should be much smaller than elastic limit.
  2. Reading is noted only after the air bubble is brought to centre of spirit level.

Problems

Question 1.
A copper wire of 1mm diameter is stretched by applying a force of 10 N. Find the stress in the wire.
Solution:
Diameter, d = 1mm
∴ radius, r = 0.5 mm = 0.5 × 10-3m
Force, F = 10N
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 29

Question 2.
A tungsten wire of length 20cm is stretched by 0.1cm. Find the strain on the wire.
Solution:
Length of wire, l = 20cm = 0.2m
elongation, e = 0.1cm = 1 × 10-3m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 30

Question 3.
If an iron wire is stretched by 1%, what is the strain on the wire?
Solution:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 31

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 4.
A brass wire of diameter 1mm and of length 2m is stretched by applying a force of 20N. If the increase in length is 0.51mm, find i) the stress, ii) the strain and iii) the Young’s modulus of the wire.
Solution:
Length of wire, l = 2m;
L diameter, d = 1mm = 10-3 m
Force, F = 20N;
Increase in length, e = 0.51mm
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 32
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 33

Question 5.
A copper wire and an aluminium wire have lengths in the ratio 3: 2, diameters in the ratio 2 : 3 and forces applied in the ratio 4: 5. Find the ratio of increase in length of the two wires. (YCu = 1.1 × 1011 Nm-2, YAl = 0.7 × 1011Nm-2)
Solution:
Ratio of lengths, l1 : l2 = 3 : 2;
Ratio of diameters, d1 : d2 = 2 : 3
Ratio of forces, F1 : F2 = 4 : 5
Y1 = Y of copper = 1.1 × 1011
Y2 = Y of Aluminium = 0.7 × 1011;
Ratio of elongation, e1 : e2 = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 34

Question 6.
A brass wire of cross-sectional area 2mm² is suspended from a rigid support and a body of volume 100cm³ is attached to its other end. If the decrease in the length of the wire is 0.11mm, when the body is completely immersed in water, find the natural length of the wire.
(Ybrass = 0.91 × 1011 Nm-2, ρwater = 10³kgm-3)
Solution:
Area of cross section, A = 2mm = 2 × 10-6
Volume of body, V = 100 cc = 100 × 10-6
Decrease in length, e’ = 0.11mm = 0.11 × 10-3m
Youngs modulus of brass, Y = 0.91 × 1011 N/m²
Density of water, ρ = 1000 kg / m³
Use e’ = \(\frac{V\rho gl}{AY}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 35

Question 7.
There are two wires of same material. Their radii and lengths are both in the ratio 1 : 2. If the extensions produced are equal, what is the ratio of the loads?
Solution:
Ratio of lengths, l1 : l2 = 1 : 2
Ratio of radii, r1 : r2 = 1 : 2
Extensions produced are equal ⇒ e1 = e2;
Made of same material ⇒ Y1 = Y2
Ratio of loads m1 : m2 = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 36

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 8.
Two wires of different material have same lengths and areas of cross-section. What is the ratio of their increase in length when forces applied are the same? (Y1 = 0.90 × 1011 Nm-2, Y2 = 3.60 × 1011 Nm-2.)
Solution:
Lengths are same ⇒ l1 = l2 ;
Area of cross sections are same, A1 = A2
Y1 = 0.9 × 1011 N/m²
Y2 = 3.60 × 1011 N/m²
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 37

Question 9.
A metal wire of length 2.5m and area of cross-section 1.5 × 10-6 m² is stretched through 2mm. If its Young’s modulus is 1.25 × 1011 Nm-2, find the tension in the wire.
Solution:
Length of wire, l = 2.5m
Y = 1.25 × 1011N/m²
Area of cross section, A = 1.5 × 10-6
Elongation, e = 2 m.m = 2 × 10-3m
Tension, T = mg = F = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 38

Question 10.
An aluminium wire and a steel wire of the same length and cross-section are joined end-to-end. The composite wire is hung from a rigid support and a load is suspended from the free end. If the increase in length of the composite wire is 1.35 mm, find the ratio of the (i) stress in the two wires and 0Q strain in the two wires. (YAl = 0.7 × 1011 Nm-2, Ysteel = 2 × 1011m-2)
Solution:
i) Length is same ⇒ l1 = l2
Area is same ⇒ A1 = A2
In composite wire same load will act on both wires.
∴ Ratio of stress = 1 : 1

ii) Total elongation, e = 1.35mm =eAl + es
Young’s modulus of aluminium = 7 × 1010 N/m²
Y of steel = 2 × 1011 N/m²
Elongation, e = \(\frac{Fl}{AY}\)
But F, l and A are same
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 39
∴ Ratio of strains in the wires is 20 : 7.

Question 11.
A 2 cm cube of some substance has its upper face displaced by 0.15cm due to a tangential force of 0.3 N while keeping the lower face fixed. Calculate the rigidity modulus of the substance.
Solution:
Side of cube, a = 2.0 cm = 2 × 10-2 m
Area, A = 4 × 10-4
Displacement of upper layer = 0.15cm
= 0.15 × 10-2m
Tangential force, F = 0.30N
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 40

Question 12.
A spherical ball of volume 1000 cm³ is subjected to a pressure of 10 atmosphere. The change in volume is 10-8 cm³. If the ball is made of iron, find its bulk modulus. (1 atmosphere = 1 × 105 Nm-2)
Solution:
Volume of ball, V = 1000 cm³ = 10-3
(∵ 1M³ = 106 cm³)
Pressure, P = 10 atmospheres
= 10 × 105 pa ( v 1 atm = 105 pascal)
Change in volume, ∆V = 10-8 cm³
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 41

Question 13.
A copper cube of side of length 1 cm is subjected to a pressure of 100 atmosphere. Find the change in its volume if the bulk modulus of copper is 1.4 × 1011 Nm-2 (1 atm = 1 × 105 Nm-2).
Solution:
Side of cube, a’ = 1cm = 10-2m
∴ Volume of cube = 10-6m
Pressure, P = 100 atm = 100 × 105 = 107 pa
Bulk modulus, K = 1.4 × 1011 N/m²;
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 42

Question 14.
Determine the pressure required to reduce the given volume of water by 2%. Bulk modulus of water is 2.2 × 109 Nm-2
Solution:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 43

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 15.
A steel wire of length 20 cm is stretched to increase its length by 0.2 cm. Find the lateral strain in the wire if the Poisson’s’ ratio for steel is 0.19.
Solution:
Length of wire, l = 20, cm = 0.20m,
Poisson’s ratio, σ =0.19
Increase in length, ∆l = 0.2 cm = 2 × 10-3m
lateral strain = ?
Lateral strain = σ × longitudinal strain ‘e’
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 10 Mechanical Properties of Solids 44

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(b) Chemical Kinetics Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Define the speed or rate of a reaction.
Answer:
The rate of a reaction is the change in con-centration of a reactant or product in unit time. It can be expressed in terms of:

  1. the rate of decrease in concentration of any one of the reactants, or
  2. the rate of increase in concentration of any one of the products.

Question 2.
Assuming that the volume of the system is constant, derive the expression for the average rate of the system R → P in terms of R and P. [time = t sec; R = reac-tant, P = product]
Answer:
Considering a hypothetical reaction assuming that the volume of the system remains constant.
R → P
One mole of the reactant R produces one mole of the product P. If [R], and [P], are the concentrations of R and P respectively at time t1 and [R]2 and [P]2 are their concentrations at time t2 then
Δt = t2 – t1 ; Δ[R] = [R]2 – [R]1
Δ[P] = [P]2 – [P]1
Rate of disappearance of R =
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 5
Rate of appearance of P =
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 6
These equations represent the average rate of a reaction.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 3.
What are the units of rate of reaction?
Answer:
The units of rate of reaction are concentration × time-1. If concentration is mol L-1 and time is in seconds then the units will be mol L-1 s-1. For gaseous reaction the units of rate equation are atm s-1.

Question 4.
Draw the graphs that relate the concen-tration (C) of the reactants and the reac-tion times (t) and the concentrations of the products (C) and the reaction times (t) in chemical reactions.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 7

Question 5.
Write the equation for the rate of the reaction
5Br (aq) + \(\mathrm{BrO}_3{ }^{-}(\mathrm{aq})\) + 6H+(aq) → 3Br2(aq) + 3H2O(l)
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 8

Question 6.
What is rate law? Illustrate with an example.
Answer:
The rate law is the expression in which rea-ction rate is given in terms of molar concen-tration of reactants. Each concentration term is raised to some power, which may or may not be same as the stoichiometric coefficient of the reacting species in balanced chemical equation. Example
2NO (g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
Rate = k [NO]2 [O2]

Question 7.
Mention a reaction for which the exponents of concentration terms are not the same as their stochiometric coefficient in the rate equation.
Answer:
i) Formation of CCl4 from CHCl3?
CHCl3 + Cl2 → CCl4 + HCl
Rate = k[CHCl3] [Cl2]1/2

ii) CH3COO C2H5 + H2O → CH3COOH
+ C2H5OH
Rate = k[CH3COOC2H5]1 [H2O]0

Question 8.
Define order of a reaction. Illustrate your answer with an example. (TS 15)
Answer:
The sum of the powers of the concentration terms of the reactants in the rate law expre-ssion is called the order of that reaction.
Order of reaction can be 0, 1, 2, 3 and even fraction.

Example :
Rate = k[A]1/2 [B]3/2
Order = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 2. i.e., second order

Question 9.
What are elementary reactions?
Answer:
The reactions taking place in one step are called elementary reactions.

Question 10.
What are complex reactions ? Name one complex reaction.
Answer:
If a reaction takes place in a sequence of elementary reactions called mechanism in which reactants convert into products, it is called complex reaction. These may be consecutive reactions, e.g. Oxidation of ethane to CO2 and H2O proceeds through a series of intermediate steps in which alcohol, aldehyde and acid are formed.

Question 11.
Give the units of rate constants for zero, first order and second order reactions.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 1

Question 12.
Define molecularity of a reaction. Illustrate with an example.
Answer:
The number of reacting species (atoms, ions, molecules) taking part in an elementary reaction, which must collide simultaneously in order to bring about a chemical reaction is called molecularity of a reaction.

Example:

i) NH4NO2 → N2 + 2H2O
Since only one molecule is involved in the reaction it is unimolecular reaction.

ii) H2 + I2 → 2HI
Since two molecules are involved in the reaction it is a bimolecular reaction.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 13.
What is rate determining step in a complex reaction ?
Answer:
Suppose if a reaction proceeds in a sequence of elementary reactions, the overall rate of reaction is controlled by the slowest step and it is called as rate determining step.

Question 14.
Give the mechanism for the decomposition reaction of H2O2 in alkaline medium cata-lysed by I ion.
Answer:
Decomposition of H2O2 in alkaline medium catalysed by I ions proceeds in the following steps.

  1. H2O2 + I → H2O + IO
  2. H2O2 + IO → H2O + I + O2

Question 15.
Write the equation relating [R], [R]0 and reaction time ‘t’ for a zero order reaction [R] = concentration of reactant at time ‘t’ and [R]0 = initial concentration of reactant.
Answer:
k = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0-[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{t}}\) ; Rate = \(\frac{-\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k[R]0
k = rate constant
[R]0 = initial concentration
[R] = concentration of reactant at time t.

Question 16.
Draw the graph that relates the concentra-tion ‘R’ of the reactant and’t’ the reaction time for a zero order reaction.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 2

Question 17.
Give two examples for zero order reactions. (TS Mar. ‘ 19 )
Answer:

  1. The decomposition of gaseous ammonia on a hot platinum surface is a zero order reaction at high pressure.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 3
  2. Thermal decomposition of HI on gold surface is zero order reactions.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 4
  3. Photochemical reactions are zero order

Question 18.
Write the Integrated equation for a first order reaction In terms of [R], [R]0 and t.
Answer:
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\) log \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]}\)
k = First order rate constant
[R] = Concentration of R at time t
[R]0 = initial concentration R

Question 19.
Give two examples for gaseous first order reactions. (IPE 14)
Answer:

  1. Hydrogenation of ethane is an example of first order reaction.
    C2H4(g) + H2(g) → C2H6(g)
  2. Decomposition of N2O5
    N2O5 (g) → 2NO2 + \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{O}_2(\mathrm{~g})\)

Question 20.
For the reaction: A(a) → B(g) + C(g), write the integrated rate equation in terms of total pressure p and the partial pressures PAPBPC.
Answer:
Total pressure Pt = PA + PB + PC
pA, pB and pC are the initial pressures of A, B and C respectively.
pi = initial pressure at time, t = 0.
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\)log \(\frac{p_i}{p_A}\) = \(\frac{2.303}{\mathrm{t}}\)log \(\frac{p_i}{2 p_i-p_t}\)

Question 21.
What is half-life of a reaction? Illustrate your answer with an example.
Answer:
The half – life of a reaction is the time in which the concentration of a reactant is reduced to one half of its initial concen-tration. It is represented by t½.
Ex: Half life of C – 14 is 5730 years.
t1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{k}}\)
For a first order reaction half-period Is constant and is independent of initial con-cent ration.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 22.
Write the equation relating the half-life (t1/2) of a reaction and the rate constant ‘K’ for first order reaction.
Answer:
For the first order reaction
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\)log \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]}\) at t1/2 [R] = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{2}\)
So the above equation becomes
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t_{1 / 2}}\) log \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]_{0 / 2}}\)
or t1/2 = \(\frac{2.303}{\mathrm{k}}\)log 2 or t1/2 = k
For a first order reaction half-period is constant and is independent of initial con-centration.

Question 23.
Write the equation useful to calculate half-life (t1/2) values for zero and first order reactions.
Answer:

  1. Half-life for zero order reaction
    t1/2 = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{2 \mathrm{k}}\)
  2. Half-life for first order reaction
    t1/2 = \(\frac{693}{\mathrm{k}}\) k is rate constant

Question 24.
What are Pseudo first order reactions? Give one example.
Answer:
The reactions which appear to be second order but follow the first order rate equation are called Pseudo first order reactions.
Example :
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 9
Since the concentration of water is large excess, the change in concentration of water is negligible. So its concentration is taken as constant. Then rate of reaction depend only on the concentration of CH3COOC2H5.
Rate = k[CH3COOC2H5]
Inversion of cane sugar is another example of pseudo first order reaction.

Question 25.
Write the Arrhenlus equation for the rate constant (k) of a reaction.
Answer:
Arrhenius equation for the rate constant (k) is
k = Ae-Ea/RT
A = Arrhenlus frequency factor
R = Gas constant
Ea = Activation energy measured in Joules mol-1
T = Absolute temperature

Question 26.
By how many times the rate constant increases for rise of reaction temperature by 10°C?
Answer:
For a chemical reaction with rise in temperature by 10° the rate constant is nearly doubled.

Question 27.
Explain the term ‘activation energy’ of a reaction with a suitable diagram.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 10
The energy required to form the intermediate called activated complex (C) is known as activatioñ energy Ea.

Question 28.
Write the equation which relates the rate constants k1 and k2 at temperatures T1 and T2 of a reaction.
Answer:
log \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_2}{\mathrm{k}_1}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{R}}\left[\frac{\mathrm{T}_2-\mathrm{T}_1}{\mathrm{~T}_1 \mathrm{~T}_2}\right]\)
k1 and k2 are the rate constants of a reaction at temperatures T1 and T2 respectively. Ea is activation energy.

Question 29.
What is collision frequency (Z) of a reac-tion? How is rate related to it for the reaction A + B → Products.
Answer:
The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reactibn mixture is known as collision frequency (Z).
For a bimolecular elementary reaction
A + B → Products
Where ZAB represents the collision frequency of reactants A and B. \(\mathrm{e}^{-\mathrm{Ea} / \mathrm{RT}}\) represent the fraction of molecules with energies equal to or greater than Ea.

Question 30.
Draw the graphs between potential energy – reaction coordinates for catalysed and uncatalysed reactions.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 11
Effect of catalyst on activation energy

Question 31.
What is the effect of temperature on the rate constant?
Answer:
The rate constant of reaction is almost doubled for every rise of 10° in temperature. The temperature dependence of rate of a
chemical reaction is given by Arrhenius equation
k = A. \(\mathrm{e}^{-\mathrm{Ea} / \mathrm{RT}}\)
A = Arrhenius frequency factor
T = Absolute temperature
R = Gas constant
Ea = Activation energy

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 32.
Define average rate of a reaction. How is the rate of reaction expressed in terms of change in the concentration of reactants and products for the following reactions.
1) 2HI (g) → H2(g) + I2(g)
2) Hg(l) + Cl2 (g) → HgCl2(s)
3) 5Br,sup>- (aq) + \(\mathrm{BrO}_3^{-}(\mathrm{aq})\) + 6H+(aq) → 3Br2(aq) + 3H2O(l)
Answer:
The average rate of a reaction is defined as the rate of change of concentration per unit time.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 12

Question 33.
What is rate equation? How is it obtained? Write the rate equations for
1) 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
2) CHCl3 + Cl2 → CCl4 + HCl
3) CH3COOC2H5(l) + H2O(l) → CH3COOH(aq) + C2H5OH(l)
Answer:
The mathematical expression written in terms of concentration of reactants, which actually influence the rate is called rate law or rate equation.

1) 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
Rate = k [NO]2 [O2]
2) CHCl3 + Cl2 → CCl4 + HCI
Rate = k [CHCl3] [Cl2]1/2
3) CH3COOC2H5 + H2O → CH3COOH + C2H5OH
Rate = k [CH3COOC2H5]1 [H2O]0

Experimental data shows that the exponents of the concentration terms may be same as their stoichiometric coefficients in the balance chemical equation as in the example (1) or may not be same as in examples (2) and (3).

Question 34.
Define and explain the order of a reaction. How is it obtained experimentally?
Answer:
The sum of the powers of exponents to which the concentration terms are raised in the rate law expression is called order of reaction.
For a hypothetical reaction
aA + bB → Products
The rate equation is Rate = k[A]x [B]y
Where x + y = n = order of the reaction. The decrease in the concentration of reactants or the increase in the concentration of products are measured experimentally. These values are substituted in rate constant equations of different order of reactions. The equation that gives constant value gives the order of reaction.

Question 35.
What is “molecularity” of a reaction? How is it different from the ‘order’ of a reaction ? Name one bimolecular and one tri- molecular gaseous reactions. (IPE 14)(Mar. 2018 AP)
Answer:
The number of reacting species (atoms, ions or molecules) taking part in an elementary reaction which must collide simultaneously in order to bring about a chemical reaction is called molecularity of a reaction.

  1. Order of a reaction is an experimental quality. It can be zero and even a fraction but molecularity cannot be zero or non – integer.
  2. Order is applicable to elementary as well as complex reactions whereas molecularity is applicable only for elementary reactions. For complex reaction molecularity has no meaning.
  3. For complex reaction, order is given by the slowest step and molecularity of the slowest step is taken as the order of the overall reaction.

Dissociation of hydrogen iodide into H2 and I2 is a bimolecular reaction.
2HI → H2 + I2
Formation of NO2 from NO and O2 is a trimolecular reaction.
2NO + O2 → 2NO2

Question 36.
Derive the integrated rate equation for a zero order reaction.
Answer:
Zero order reaction means that the rate of the reaction is proportional to zero power of the concentration of reactants. Consider the reaction
R → P
Rate = –\(\frac{\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k[R]°
or Rate = –\(\frac{\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k × 1( ∵ [R]° = 1)
d[R] = – kdt
Integrating both sides
[R] = – kt +1 (I = integration constant) … (1)
At t = 0, the concentration of the reactant
R0 = [R]0, When [R]0 is initial concentration of the reactant.
Substituting in equation (1)
[R]0 = -k × 0 + 1
[R]0 = I
Substituting the value of I in (1)
[R] = – kt + [R]0 ….. (2)
Further simplifying equation (2) we get the rate constant k as
k = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0-[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{t}}\)

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 37.
Derive an Integrated rate equation for a first order reaction.
Answer:
In this type of reactions, the rate of the reaction is proportional to the first power of the concentration of the reactant R. For
example
Rate = –\(\frac{\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k[R] or \(-\frac{\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{R}}\) = kdt
Integrating tuis equation we get
In [R] = -kt + I (I = integration constant) ….. (1)
When t = 0, [R] = [R]0
∴ ln [R]0 = -k × 0 + I
ln [R]0 = I
Substituting the value I in equation (1)
ln[R] = -kt + ln[R]0 or ln \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]}{\left[\mathrm{R}_0\right]}\) = -kt
or k = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{t}} \ln \frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]}\) or k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{[R]_0}{[R]}\)
This is the integrated rate equation for first order reaction.

Question 38.
Derive an integrated rate equation in terms of total pressure [P] and the partial pressures PA, PB, PC for the gaseous reaction
A(g) → B(g) + C(g).
Answer:
The gaseous reaction A(g) → B(g) + C(g)
Let P1 be the initial pressure of A and bt the total pressure at time t. Integrated rate equation for such a react Ion can be derived as
Total pressure Pt = PA + PB + PC
PA, PB and PC are the partial pressures of A, B and C respectively.
If x atm be the decrease in pressure of A at time t and one mole each of B and C is being formed, the increase in pressure of B and C will also be x atm each.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 13
When pi is the intial pressure at time t = 0
Pt = (pi – x) + x + x = pi + x
x = pt – pi
Where PA = pi – x
= pi – (pt – pi)
= 2pi – pt
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\)log\(\frac{p_i}{p_A}\)
= \(\frac{2.303}{t}\)log\(\frac{p_i}{2 p_i-p_t}\)

Question 39.
What is half-life (t1/2) of a reaction? Derive the equations for the ‘half-life’ value of zero and first order reactions.
Answer:
The half – life of a reaction is the time in which the concentration of a reactant is reduced to one half of its initial concentra-tion. It is represented as t½.
For the first order reaction
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\) log\(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{[\mathrm{R}]}\) at t1/2[R] = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{2}\)
So the above equation becomes
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 14

Question 40.
What is Arrhenius equation? Derive an equation which describes the effect of rise of temperature (T) on the rate constant (k) of a reaction.
Answer:
Arrhenius equation explains the temperature dependence of the rate of a chemical reac-tion. Arrhenius equation is
k = Ae-Ea/RT
Where A is the Arrhenius factor, or the frequency factor. R is gas constant and Ea is activation energy in J mol-1.
Taking natural logarithms of both sides
In k = –\(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}}\) + ln A …… (1)
At temperature T1, the equation (1) is
In k1 = –\(\frac{E_a}{R T}\) + ln A …… (2)
At temperature T2, the equation (1) is
In k2 = –\(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}}\) + ln A …… (3)
Subtracting equation (2) from (3) we get
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 15

Question 41.
Discuss the effect of catalyst on the kinetics of a chemical reaction with a suitable diagram.
Answer:
A catalyst is a substance which increase the rate of a reaction without itself undergoing any permanent chemical change.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 16
It is believed that the catalyst provides an alternate pathway or reaction mechanism by reducing the activation energy between reactants and products and hence lowering the potential energy barrier as shown in the figure. Lower the value of activation energy faster will be the rate of reaction.

Question 42.
Describe the salient features of the collision theory of reaction rates of bimolecular reactions. (Mar. 2018-TS)
Answer:
Collision theory is based on kinetic theory of gases. According to this theory

  1. The reactant molecules are assumed to be hard spheres and
  2. Reaction is postulated to occur when molecules collide with eách other.
  3. A reaction occurs on collision of two molecules only if they possess a certain minimum amount of energy in excess of the normal energy of molecules.
  4. The minimum energy which molecules must possess before collision should be equal to or greater than the activation energy.
  5. The collisions in which the reactant molecules have proper orientation only leads to the formation of products.
  6. Whereas Improper orientation makes them bounce back and no products are formed.
  7. The collisions in which reactant molecules convert into product molecules are called effective or fruitful collisions.

Question 43.
Explain the terms
a) Activation energy (Ea)
b) ColIsIon frequency (Z)
c) Probability factor (P) with respect to Arrhenius equation.
Answer:
a) Activation energy : According to Arrhenius, a reaction takes place only when reactant molecules collide and form an unstable intermediate which have higher potential energy than reactant or product molecules. The energy required
for the formation of this intermediate or activated complex is called activation energy.

b) Collision frequency : According to collision theory the reactant molecules are assumed to be hard spheres and reaction occurs when molecules collide with each other. The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction mixture is known as collision frequency (Z). For the bimolecular elementary
A + B → Products
Rate = ZAB\(\mathrm{e}^{-\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}} / \mathrm{RT}}\)
ZAB represents the collision frequency of reactants A and B.

c) Probability factor: To account for effective collisions, a factor known as probability factor or steric factor is introducted. It takes into account the fact that in a collision molecules must be properly oriented.
(ie.,) Rate = P × ZABeEa/RT
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 17

Long Answer Questions

Question 44.
Explain the following terms with suitable examples.
(a) Average rate of a reaction
(b) Slow and fast reactions
(c) Order of a reaction
(d) Molecularity of a reaction
(e) Activation energy of a reaction.
Answer:
a) Average rate of a reaction : The average rate of a reaction is defined as the rate of change of concentration per unit time.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 18

b) Slow and fast reactIons : The reactions which takes place instantaneously are called fast reactions. Ionic reactions are fast reactions e.g. Precipitation of silver chloride occurs instantaneously by mixing aqueous solutions of silver nitrate and sodium cholride.
Some reactions takes place slowly e.g. rusting of iron, invension of sugar, hydrolysis of starch. These reactions are called slow reactions.

c) Order of ReactIon : The sum of the powers or exponents to which the concentration terms are raised in the rate law expression is called order of reaction.
For a hypothetical reaction
aA + bB → Products
The rate equation is Rate = k[A]x [B]y
Where x + y = n = order of the reaction.

d) Molecularity of the reaction : The number of reacting species (atoms or ions or molecules) taking part in an elementary reaction which must collide simultaneously in order to bring about a chemical reaction is called molecularity of a reaction.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 19

e) Activation energy of a reaction: Accor-ding to Arrhenius, a reaction takes place only when reactant molecules collide and form an unstable intermediate which have higher potential energy than reac-tant or product molecules. The energy required for the formation of this inter-mediate or activated complex is called activation energy.
Ea = ET – ER

Question 45.
Give two examples for each of zero order and first order reactions. Write the equa-tions for the rate of a reaction interms of concentration changes of reactants and products for the following reactions.
1) A(g) + B(g) → C(g) + D(g)
2) A(g) → B(g) + C(g)
3) A(g) + B(g) → C(g)
Answer:
Examples for zero order reaction :

i) The decomposition of gaseous ammonia on a hot platinum surface is a zero order reaction at higher pressure.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 20
At high pressure, the surface of the metal is completely covered with gas molecules, so unable to alter the ammonia on the surface of the catalyst making the rate of reaction independent of its concentration.

ii) Thermal decomposition of HI on gold surface is another example of zero order reaction.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 21

iii) Some enzyme catalysed reactions are zero order reactions.

Examples for first order reactions:

i) Decomposition of N2O5.
N2O5 → 2NO2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)O2

ii) All natural and artificial radioactive decay of unstable nuclei take place by first order kinetics.
\({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra}\) → \({ }_2^4 \mathrm{He}\) + \({ }_{86}^{224} \mathrm{Rn}\)

Rate of reactions:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 22

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 46.
Discuss the effect of temperature on the rate of a reaction. Derive necessary equations in this context.
Answer:
The rate constant of a reaction increases with increase of temperature. This increase is generally two fold to five-fold for 10° rise in temperature. This is explained on the basis of collision theory. The main points of collision theory are as follows.

  1. For a reaction to occur, there must be collisions between the reacting species.
  2. Only a certain fraction of total collisions are effective in forming the products.
  3. For effective collisions the molecules must possess the sufficient energy equal to or greater than activation energy as well as proper orientation.

On the basis of above conclusions, rate of reaction is given by
Rate = f × z where f is the effective collisions and z is total number of collisions per unit volume per second.

Quatitatively the effect of temperature on the rate of reaction and hence on the rate constant k was proposed by Arrhenlus.
k = Ae-Ea/RT —– (1)

Where A is a constant called frequency factor, Ea is the energy of activation R is gas constant and T is the absolute temperature.
The factor e-Ea/RT gives the fraction of molecules having energy equal to or greater than the activation energy, Ea.
Taking logarithms on both sides of equation (1) we get
In k = ln A – \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
The value of rate constant at temperatures T1 and T2 are k1 and k2 respectively, then we have
ln k1 = ln A – \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}_1}\) …. (2)
ln k2 = ln A – \(\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}_2}\) …. (3)
Subtracting equation (2) from (3) we get
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 23

Question 47.
Give a detailed account of the collision theory of reaction rates of bimolecular gaseous reactions. (TS 16: IPE 14)
(TS Mar. 19; (Mar.2018.TS)
Answer:
According to collision theory

  1. The reactant molecules are assumed to be hard spheres.
  2. Reaction occur only when molecules collide each other.
  3. All collisions do not lead to the forma-tion of products.
  4. The collisions in which the molecules having threshold energy and proper orientation leads to the formation of products.
  5. Such collisions are called effective collisions.
  6. The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction mixture is known as collision frequency (Z).
  7. Activation energy also effects the rate chemical reactions. For a bimolecular elementary reaction.
    A + B → Products Rate of reaction is
    Rate = ZAB e-Ea/RT
    Where ZAB represents the collision frequency of reactants. A and B and e-Ea/RT represents the fraction of molecules with energies equal to or greater than Ea.
  8. If the colliding molecules have improper orientation they bounce back and no reaction takes place.
  9. To account for effective collisions a new factor ‘p called probability or steric factor is introduced
    Rate = PZABe-Ea/RT
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 24
  10. Thus, in collision theory activation energy and proper orientation of the molecules together determine the criteria for
    an effective collision and hence the rate of a chemical reaction.

Numerical Data Based And Concept Oriented Questions

Question 48.
A reaction is 50% completed in 2 hours and 75% completed In 4 hours. What is the order of the reaction?
Answer:
50% completed means half – life.
So for first order reaction t1/2 = 0.
or k = \(\frac{0.693}{k}\) = 0.3465 mol hr-1
In the second experiment 75% completed in 4 hours.
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{[R]_0}{[R]}\)
[R]0 = 100, [R] = 25
∴ k = \(\frac{2.303}{4}\)log\(\frac{100}{25}\) = \(\frac{2.303}{4}\) log 4
= \(\frac{2.303}{4}\) × 0.6021 = 0.3466
Since k is constant in both experiments, it is first order reaction.

Question 49.
A reaction has a half-life of 10 minutes. Calculate the rate constant for the first order reaction. (TS ’16)
Answer:
For first order reaction
k = \(\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{10}\) = 0.0693 min-1

Question 50.
In a first order reaction, the concentration of the reactant is reduced from 0.6 mol/L to 0.2 mol/L m 5 min. Calculate the rate constant (k).
Answer:
Initial concentration [R]0 = 0.6 moL/L
Concentration after 5mn [R] = 0.2 mol /L
First order rate equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 25

Question 51.
The rate conant for a zero order reaction in A is 0.0030 mol L-1 s-1. How long it will take for the initial concentration of A to fall from 0.10M to 0.075M.
Answer:
For zero order reaction
k = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0-[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{t}}\) or t = \(\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0-[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{t}}\)
k = 0.0030 mol L-1 s-1
[R]0 = 0.10M
[R] = 0.075
∴ t = \(\frac{0.10-0.075}{0.0030}\) = 8.33 sec

Question 52.
A first order decomposition reaction takes 40mm for 30% decomposition. Calculate its t1/2 value.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 26

Question 53.
Calculate the half-lIfe of first order reaction whose rate constant is 200 s-1.
Answer:
For first order reaction
t1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{k}}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{200}\) = 0.003465
= 3.465 × 10-3 s

Question 54.
The thermal decomposition of HCOOH is a first order reaction. The rate constant is 2.4 × 10-3 s-1 at a certain temperature. Calculate how long will It take for 3/4 of initial quantity of HCOOH to decompose.
Answer:
Rate constant k = 2.4 × 10-3s-1
[R]0 = 1; [R] = 0.25 ;
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 27

Question 55.
The decomposition of a compound is found to follow first order rate law. If it takes 15 minutes for 20% of original material to
react, calculate the rate constant.
Answer:
For a first order reaction
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{[R]_0}{[R]}\)
[R]0 = 100; [R] =80; t = 15
k = \(\frac{2.303}{15}\)log\(\frac{100}{80}\) = \(\frac{2.303}{15}\) log 1.25
= \(\frac{2.303}{15}\) × 0.0963 = 0.0148 min-1

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 56.
In a pseudo first order hydrolysis of ester in water, the following results are obtained
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 28
Calculate the average rate of reaction between the time Interval 30 to 60 s.
Answer:
i) Average rate of reaction between interval time 30 to 60 seconds is given by
Average rate = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{x}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_2-\mathrm{C}_1}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
= \(\frac{0.17-0.31}{60}\) = \(-\frac{0.14}{30}\)
= -0.00467 = -4.67 × 10-3 Ms-1
Minus sign indicate that the rate of reaction is decreasing with time as concentration of ester is decreasing with time.

ii)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 29

Question 57.
The half – life for a first order reaction is 5 × 10-6 s. What percentage of the Initial reactant will react in 2 hours?
Answer:
Given that
Half-life for the first order reaction = 5 × 10-6 s
First order rate constant, k = \(\frac{0.693}{5 \times 10^{-6} \mathrm{~s}}\)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 30

Question 58.
H2O2 (aq) decomposes to H2O(l) and O2(g) in a first order reaction w.r.t. H2O2. The rate constant is k = 1.06 × 10-3 min-1. How long it will take 15% of the sample to de-compose ?
Answer:
Given that
Rate constant k = 1.06 × 10-3 min-1
Initial concentration of reactant [R]0 = 100
Concentration of reactant at time
t[R]t = 100 – 15 = 85
First order rate constant
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{\left[R_o\right]}{[R]}\);
t = \(\frac{2.303}{1.06 \times 10^{-3}} \log \frac{100}{85}\) ; t = 153 min

Question 59.
Show that in the case of first order reaction, the time required for 9999% completion of the reaction is 10 times that required for 50% completion. (log 2 = 3010)
Answer:
When the reaction has completed 99.9%
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 31

Question 60.
The rate constant of a reaction is doubled when the temperature is raised from 298K to 308K. Calculate the activation energy.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 32

Question 61.
The first order rate constant k for the reaction C6H5I(g) → C2H4(g) + HI(g) at 600K is 1.60 × 10-5s-1. The energy of activation is 209 kJ mol. Calculate k at 700 K.
Answer:
Given that
Rate constant at 600 K = 1.60 × 10-5 s-1
Rate constant at 700 K =?
R = 8.314 J kJ mol-1
T1 = 600K T2 = 700K
Activation energy Ea = 209 kJ mol-1 = 209000 J
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 33

Question 62.
The activation energy for the reaction 2HI(g) → H2(g) + I2(g) at 581K is 209.5 kJ/mol. Calculate the fraction of molecules having energy equal to or greater than activation energy. (R = 8.31 JK-1 mol-1]
Answer:
Temperature T = 581K
Activation energy Ea = 209.5 JK mol-1
R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 34

Question 63.
For the reaction R → p, the concentration of a reactant changes from 0.03M to 0.02M in 25 minutes. Calculate the average
rate of reaction using units seconds.
Answer:
Given that
[R]0 = 0.03M
[R] = 0.02M
[R]0 – [R] = 0.03 – 0.02 = 0.01M
Time = 25 mm = 25 × 60 sec.
Average rate of reaction = \(\frac{[R]_0-[R]}{t}\)
= \(\frac{0.01}{25 \times 60}\) = 6.66 × 10-6 Ms-1

Question 64.
In a reaction 2A → Products, the concentration of A decreases from 0.5 mol L-1 to 0.4 moL-1 in 10 minutes. Calculate the rate during this Interval.
Answer:
2A → Products
Rate \(\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(-\frac{1}{2} \frac{\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
Δ[A] = 0.5 – 0.4 = 0.1 mol-1
Rate = \(-\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{0.1}{10}\) = 5 × 10-3 mol-1 L-1 min-1

Question 65.
For a reaction, A + B → product : the rate law is given by r = k[A]1/2[B]2. What is the order of reaction?
Answer:
Order of reaction Is the sum of the powers of concentration terms in rate equation.
Rate equation r = k[A]1/2 [B]2
∴ order = 0.5 + 2 = 2.5

Question 66.
The conversion of molecules X to Y follows second order kinetics. If concentration of X is increased by three times, how will it affect the rate of formation of Y.
Answer:
Since the reaction follows second order kinetics r = k(x)2
x increases by 3 times
∴ r = k(3)2
So rate increases by nine times.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 67.
A first order reaction has a rate constant 1.15 × 10-3s-1. How long will 5g of this reactant take to reduce to 3g ?
Answer:
Rate constant k = 1.15 × 10-3s-1
Initial cone. [R]0 = 5
Conc. at time t [R] = 3
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 35

Question 68.
Time required to decompose SO2Cl2 to half of its initial amount is 60 minutes. If the decomposition is a first order reaction, calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
Answer:
For first order reaction
k = \(\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{60 \times 60}\) = 1.925 × 10-4 sec-1
(or) 1.155 × 10-2 min-1

Question 69.
From the rate expression for the following reactions, determine their order of reaction and the dimensions of the rate constants.
i) 3NO(g) → N2O(g)
Rate = k[NO]2
ii) H2O2(aq) + 3I(aq) + 2H+ → 2H2O(l) + \(I_3^{-}\)
Rate = k[H2O2] [I]
iii) CH3CHO(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)
Rae = k[CH3CHO]3/2
iv) C2H5Cl (g) → C2H4 (g) + HCl(g)
Rate = k[C2H5Cl]
Answer:
i) 3NO(g) → N2O (g)
Rate = k[NO]2
Order w.r.t NO = 2
Overall order = 2
Units of k = (mol L-1)1-2 s-1
= mol-1 L s-1

ii) H2O2 + 3l + 2H+ → 2H2O + \(I_3^{-}(\mathrm{aq})\)
rate = k[H2O2] [I]
Order w.r.t. H2O2 = 1
Order w.r.t. I = 1
Overall order =2
Units of k = (mol L-1)1-2 s-1
= mol-1 L s-1

iii) CH3 CHO(g) → CH4(g) + CO(g)
rate = k[CH3CHO]3/2
Order w.r.t. CH3CHO = 1.5
Overall order = 1.5
Units of k = (mol L-1)1-1.5s-1
= mol1/2 L1/2 s-1

iv) C2H5Cl(g) → C2H4(g) + HCl (g)
rate = k[C2H5Cl]
order w.r.t. C2H5Cl = 1
overall order = 1
Units of k = (mol L-1)1-1 s-1
= s-1

Question 70.
For the reaction 2A + B → AB, the rate = k[A][B]2 with k = 2.0 × 106 v mol-2 L2s-1. Calculate the Initial rate of the reaction when [A] = 0.1mol L-1, [B] = 0.2 mol L-1. Calculate the rate of reaction after [A] is reduced to 0.06 mol L-1.
Answer:
Given that
k = 2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1
[A] = 0.1 mol L-1
[B] = 0.2 mol L-1

i) Initial rate = k[A] [B]2
= 2 × 10-6 × 0.1 × (0.2)2
∴ Rate of reaction = 8 × 10-9 mol L-1sec-1

ii) 2A + B → AB
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 36
r = 2 × 10-6 × 0.06 × (0.18)2
∴ Rate of reaction = 3.89 × 10-9 mol L-1sec-1

Question 71.
The decomposition of NH3 on platinum surface is zero order reaction. What are the rates of production of N2 and H2 if k = 2.5 × 10-4 mol-1 Ls-1.
Answer:
Since the decomposition of NH3 on platinum surface is zero order.
So rate of reaction k = 2.5 × 10-4 mol L-1 sec-1.
2NH3 → N2 + 3H2
\(\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{1}{3} \frac{\mathrm{dH}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
Rate production of N2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{dN}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
= 2.5 × 10-4 mol-1 L-1 sec-1
Rate production of H2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{dH}_2}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = \(\frac{3 \mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
= 7.5 × 10-4 mol L-1 sec-1

Question 72.
The rate expression for the decomposition of dimethyl ether in terms of partial pressures is given as Rate = k(pCH3 O CH3)3/2. If the pressure is measured in bar and time in minutes, then what are the units of rate and rate constant ?
Answer:
Units of rate = bar min-1
r = k p3/2
bar min-1 = k (bar)3/2
∴ k = bar-1/2 min-1

Question 73.
A reaction is second order with respect to a reactant. How is the rate of reaction is affected if the concentration of the reactant is
(i) doubled
(ii) reduced to half.
Answer:
Ratio of second order reaction = k[Reactant]2
When the concentration is doubled Rate = k[2]2
∴ Rate increases by 4 times.
When concentration is reduced to half.
rate = k\(\left[\frac{1}{2}\right]^2\)
∴ Rate decreases to \(\frac{1}{4}\) times.

Question 74.
A reaction is first order in A and second order in B.
i) Write the differential rate equation,
ii) How is the rate affected on increasing the concentration of B three times ?
iii) How is the rate affected when the concentration of both A and B are doubled ?
Answer:
The reaction is first order in A and second order in B.
∴ The differential rate equation r = k [A]1 [B]2
When the concentration of B is increased three times r = k[A][B]2
∴ rate increases by 9 times
When the concentration of both A and B are doubled
r = k[2][2]2
∴ Rate increases by 8 times.

Question 75.
In a reaction between A and B, the initial rate of reaction (r0) was measured for different initial concentrations of A and B as given below :
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 37
What is the order of the reaction with respect to A and B ?
Answer:
Rate of reaction r = kAm Bn
5.07 × 10-5 = k(0.2)m (0.3)n
5.07 × 10-5 = k(0.2)m (0.1)n
1.43 × 10-5 = k(0.4)m (0.05)n
∴ order of reaction with respect to A = 1.5
∴ r = k A1.5 B0
order of reaction with respect to B = 0

Question 76.
The following results have been obtained during the kinetic studies of the reaction:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 38
Determine the rate law and rate constant for the reaction.
Answer:
When [A] = [B] the intial rate of formation of D is 6.0 × 10-3 mol L-1 min-1
From the experiment no.4 when the concentration of A is increased four times keeping the concentration B. Constant the rate increases by 4 times i.e.
6.0 × 10-3 × 4 = 2.4 × 10-2
So the order of reaction with respect to A is 1
From the experiments 2 and 3, when the concentration of B is doubled keeping the concentration of A constant the rate increases by 4 times i.e.,
7.2 × 10-2 × 4 = 2.88 × 10
∴ The order of reaction w.r.t B = 2
Rate law = k[A][B]2
Rate = k[A][B]2
6.0 × 10-3 = k[0.1] [0.1]2
6.0 × 10-3 = k × 1 × 10-3
k = \(\frac{6.0 \times 10^{-3}}{10^{-3}}\) = 6.0 Mol-1 L2 min-1

Question 77.
The rate constant for a first order is 60 s-1. How much time will It take to reduce the initial concentration of the reactant to its 1/16th value.
Answer:
Rate constant = 60 s-1
For first order reaction
t1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{k}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{60}\) = 0.01155 sec.
t = 4t1/2 = 4 × 0.01155 = 4.62 × 10-2 sec.

Question 78.
For a first order reaction, show that the time required for 99% completion is twice the time required for completion of 90% of reaction.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 39
∴ The time required for 99% completion is twice the time required for completion of 90% reaction.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 79.
For the decomposition of azoisopropane to hexane and nitrogen at 543 K, the following data are obtained.

t(sec) p(mm of Hg)
0 35.0
360 54.0
720 63.0

Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 40

Question 80.
The following data were obtained during the first order thermal decomposition of SO2Cl2 at a constant volume.
SO2Cl2(g) → SO2 (g) + Cl2 (g)

Experiment Time/s-1 Total Pressure / atm
1 0 0.5
2 100 0.6

Calculate the rate of reaction when total pressure is 0.65 atm.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 41
Pressure of SO2Cl2 = 0.35
∴ r = k[SO2Cl2] = (2.23 × 10-3) (0.35)
= 7.8 × 10-4 atm sec-1

Question 81.
The rate constant for the decomposition of hydrocarbons is 2.418 × 10-5 s-1 at 546K. If the energy of activation is 179.9 kJ / mol. What will be the value of pre – exponential factor?
Answer:
Rate constant for the decomposition of hydrocarbon = 2.418 × 10-5s-1
Temperature T = 546 K
Energy of activation Ea = 179.9 kJ / mol.
The value of pre-exponential factor ?
k = Ae-Ea/RT
2.418 × 10-5 = A.e-179.103/8.314 × 546
∴ A = 3.9 × 1012 sec-1.

Question 82.
Consider a certain reaction A → Products with k = 2.0 × 10-2 s-1. Calculate the concentration of A remaining after 100s if the initial concentration of A is 1.0 mol L-1.
Answer:
Rate constant k = 2.0 × 10-2 sec-1
Initial concentration [R]0 = 1.0 mol L-1
Time t = 100 s
Concentration after time T = [R] =?
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{[R]_0}{[R]}\)
2 × 102 = \(\frac{2.303}{100} \log \frac{1}{1-x}\)
log \(\frac{1}{1-x}\) = 0.868
∴ 1 – x = 0.135M

Question 83.
Sucrose decomposes in acid solution into glucose and fructose according to the first order rate law, with t1/2 = 3.00 hours. What fraction of sample of sucrose remains after 8 hours ?
Answer:
Decomposition of sucrose in acid solution follows first order kinetics
Half – life t1/2 = 3.00 hours
For first order
k = \(\frac{0.693}{3} \mathrm{hr}^{-1}\)
∴ \(\frac{0.693}{3}\) = \(\frac{2.303}{8} \log \frac{1}{1-x}\)
1 – x = 0.157

Question 84.
The decomposition of hydrocarbon follows the equation
K = (4.5 × 1011 s-1) e-28000k/T. Calculate Ea.
Answer:
K = Ae-Ea/RT
\(\frac{E_a}{R}\) = 28000
Ea = 232.79 kJ/mole

Question 85.
The rate constant for the first order de-composition of H2O2 is given by the following equation: log k = 14.34 – 1.25 × 104 K/T. Calculate Ea for this reaction and at what a temperature will its half – life period be 256 minutes ?
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 42

Question 86.
The decomposition of A into product has value of k as 4.5 × 103 S-1 at 10°C and energy of activation 60 kJ mol-1. At what temperature would k be 1.5 × 104 s-1?
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 43

Question 87.
The time required for 10% completion of a first order reaction at 298 K is equal to that required for Its 25% completion at 308K. If the value of A is 4 × 1010 s-1, cal-culate k at 318 K and Ea.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 44

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 88.
The rate of a reaction quadruples when the temperature changes from 293 K to 313 K. Calculate the energy of activation
of the reaction assuming that it does not change with temperature.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 45

Intext Questions – Answerš

Question 1.
For the reaction R → P, the concentration of a reactant changes from 003M to 002M in 25 minutes. Calculate the average rate of reaction using units of time both in minutes and seconds.
Answer:
The average rate of reaction will be
= \(-\frac{\Delta R}{\Delta t}\) = –\(\frac{[R]_2-[R]_1}{t_2-t_1}\)
Now [R]2 = 0.02M, [R]1 = 0.03M, Δt = 25mm
∴Average rate = –\(\frac{0.02-0.03}{25}\) = –\(\frac{(-0.01)}{25}\)
= 4 × 10-4M min-1
= \(-\frac{(0.01)}{25 \times 60}\) = 6.66 × 10-6Ms-1

Question 2.
In a reaction 2A → products, the concentration of A decreases from 0.5 mol L-1 to 0.4 mol L-1 in 10 minutes. Calculate the rate during this Interval.
Answer:
Average rate = \(-\frac{1}{2} \frac{0.4-0.5}{10}\) = \(-\frac{1}{2} \frac{(-0.1)}{10}\)
= 5 × 10-3 M min-1

Question 3.
For a reaction A + B → product; the rate law is given by, r = k[A]1/2 [B]2. What is the order of the reaction?
Answer:
The order of reaction ¡s sum of powers of concentration terms.
Order = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 2 = 2.5

Question 4.
The conversion of molecules x to y follows second order kinetics. If concentration of x is increased to threetlmes, how will it
effect the rate of formation of y?
Answer:
The reaction x → y follows second order Kinetics. Therefore, the rate equation for this reaction will be Rate = K[x]2
Let [x] = a mol L-1, then equation (1) can be written as
Rate = K. (a)2 = Ka2
If the concentration of x is Increased to three times then [x] = 3a mol L
Now the rate equation will be
Rate = K(3a)2 = 9(Ka)2
Hence the rate of formation will increase by 9 times.

Question 5.
A first order reaction has a rate constant 1.15 × 10-3s-1. How long will 5gm of this reactant take to reduce 3g?
Answer:
Given, Initial amount = 5g
Rate constant = 1.15 × 10-3 s-1
We know that for a 1st order reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 46

Question 6.
Time required to decompose SO2Cl2 to half of its initial amount is 60 minutes. If the decomposition is a first order reaction. Calculate the rate constant.
Answer:
We know that for a ¡st order reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 47

Question 7.
What will be the effect of temperature on rate constant?
Answer:
The rate constant of reaction is almost doubled for every rise of 100 in temperature. The temperature dependence of rate of a chemical reaçtion is given by Arrhenius equation
k = A.e-Ea/RT
A = Arrhenius frequency factor
T = Absolute temperature
R = Gas constant
Ea = Activation energy

Question 8.
The rate of the chemical reaction doubles for an increase of 10K in absolute temperature from 298 K. Calculate Ea.
Answer:
Given that T1 = 298 K
T2 = 298 + 10 = 308K
The rate of reaction will be doubled when temperature is raised by 100.
∴If the value of k1 = k; k2 = 2k
Substituting these values in Arhenious equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 48

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 9.
The activation energy for the reaction
2HI (g) → H2(g) + I2(g) is 209.5kJ mol-1 at 581 K. Calculate the fraction of molecules of reactants having energy equal to or greater than activation energy.
Answer:
Here
Ea = 209.5kJ mol-1 = 209500 J mol-1
T = 581K; R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
The fraction of molecules having energy equal or more than activation energy is given by
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 49
Now x = Anti log of 18.8323
= Anti log 19.1677 = 1.471 × 10-19

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 1.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 12 + 22 + 32 + ……………… + n2 = \(\frac{n(n+1)(2 n+1)}{6}\)
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that 12 + 22 + 32 + …………… + n2 = \(\frac{n(n+1)(2 n+1)}{6}\)
If n = 1, then
LHS = n2 = 12 = 1
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 1
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 12 + 22 + 32 + ……………… +n2 = \(\frac{n(n+1)(2 n+1)}{6}\), ∀ n ∈ N.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 2.
By using mathematical Induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 13 + 23 + 33 + …………. + n3 = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\). [May 97, 94, 93, 88, Mar. 87]
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that 13 + 23 + 33 + ……….. + n3 = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\)
If n = 1, then
L.H.S = n3 = 13
R.H.S = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1^2(1+1)^2}{4}\) = \(\frac{1.4}{4}\) = 1
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 2
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 13 + 23 + 33 + ………… + n3 = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\), ∀ n ∈ N

Question 3.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 2.3 + 3.4 + 4.5 + …………. upto n terms = \(\frac{n\left(n^2+6 n+11\right)}{3}\)
Answer:
2, 3, 4 ……………………. are in A.P.
Here a = 2, d = 3 – 2 = 1
∴ tn = a + (n – 1)d = 2 + (n – 1)1 = 2 + n – 1 = n + 1.
3, 4, 5 …………………… are in A.P.
Here a = 3, d = 4 – 3 = 1
∴ tn = a + (n – 1) d = 3 + (n – 1) 1 = 3 + n – 1 = n + 2.
∴ The nth term of the given series is (n + 1) (n + 2).
Let S(n) be the statement that
2.3 + 3.4 + 4.5 + + (n + 1) (n + 2) = \(\frac{n\left(n^2+6 n+11\right)}{3}\)
If n = 1, then
LHS = (n + 1) (n + 2) = (1 + 1) (1 + 2) = 2.3 = 6
RHS = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}\left(\mathrm{n}^2+6 \mathrm{n}+11\right)}{3}\) = \(\frac{1\left(1^2+6(1)+11\right)}{3}\) = \(\frac{18}{3}\) = 6
∴ LHS = RHS
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 3

Verification Method:
\(\frac{\mathrm{n}\left(\mathrm{n}^2+6 n+11\right)}{3}\)
Put n = k + 1
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 4
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 2.3 + 3.4 + 4.5 + ……………… + (n + 1) (n + 2) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}\left(\mathrm{n}^2+6 \mathrm{n}+11\right)}{3}\), ∀ n ∈ N

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 4.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N,
\(\frac{1}{1.3}+\frac{1}{3.5}+\frac{1}{5.7}+\ldots+\frac{1}{(2 n-1)(2 n+1)}=\frac{n}{2 n+1}\) [Mar. 18 May 15 (AP): May 14, 97, 92]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 5

Question 5.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, \(\frac{1}{1 \cdot 4}+\frac{1}{4 \cdot 7}+\frac{1}{7 \cdot 10}+\) …………….. upto n terms = \(\frac{n}{3 n+1}\).
Answer:
1, 4, 7, ………………… are in A.P.
Here, a = 1, d = 4 – 1 = 3
tn = a + (n – 1) d = 1 + (n – 1)3 = 1 + 3n – 3 = 3n – 2
4, 7, 10, ………………. are in A.P.
Here, a = 4, d = 7 – 4 = 3
tn = a + (n – 1) d = 4 + (n – 1)3 = 4 + 3n – 3 = 3n + 1
∴ The nth term in the given series is \(\frac{1}{(3 n-2)(3 n+1)}\).
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 6

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 6.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N,
a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + upto n terms = \(\frac{n}{2}\) [2a + (n – 1) d].
Answer:
a, a + d, a + 2d, ………………….. are in A.P
∴ tn = a + (n – 1) d
∴ n th term in the given series is a + (n – 1) d.
Let S(n) be the statement that
a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + ………………. + a + (n – 1) d = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{2}\) [2a + (n – 1) d]
If n = 1 then
L.H.S = a + (n – 1)d = a + (1 – 1)d = a
R.H.S = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{2}\) [2a + (n – 1)d] = \(\frac{1}{2}\) [2a + (1 – 1)d] = \(\frac{1}{2}\) [2a] = a
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true.
[a + (n – 1)d
put n = k + 1
a + (k + 1 – 1)d
= a + kd]
Assume that S(k) is true.
a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + ………………… + [a + (k- 1) d] = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}}{2}\) [2a + (k – 1)d]
Adding (a + kd) on both sides, we get
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 7
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of Mathematical Induction, s(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N
∴ a + (a + d) + (a + 2d) + ….+ a + (n- 1) d = \(\frac{n}{2}\) [2a + (n – 1) d], ∀ n ∈ N

Question 7.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N,
a + ar + ar2 + ………. upto n terms = \(\frac{a\left(r^n-1\right)}{r-1}\), r ≠ 1. [Mar. 19 (AP); Mar. 11, 80; May 87]
Answer:
a + ar + ar2 + ………. are in G.P.
∴ tn = a . rn – 1
The n th term in the given series is a . r n – 1
Let S(n) be the statement that
a + ar + ar2 + …………. + a ∙ rn – 1 = \(\frac{a\left(r^n-1\right)}{r-1}\)
If n = 1, then
L.H.S = a ∙ rn – 1 = a ∙ r1 – 1 = a ∙ r0 = a ∙ 1 = a
R.H.S = \(\frac{a\left(r^n-1\right)}{r-1}=\frac{a\left(r^1-1\right)}{r-1}=\frac{a(r-1)}{r-1}\) = a
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true.
[a.rn – 1
Put n = k + 1
a.rk + 1 – 1
a.rk]
Assume that S(k) is true.
a + ar + ar2 + …….. + a.rk – 1 = \(\frac{a\left(r^k-1\right)}{r-1}\)
Adding ark on both sides we get,
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 8
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ a + ar + ar2 + ………………. + a . rn – 1 = \(\frac{a\left(r^n-1\right)}{r-1}\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 8.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + …………………. upto n terms = \(\frac{n(n+1)(n+2)(n+3)}{4}\)
Answer:
1, 2, 3 …………………. are in A.P.
Here a = 1, d = t2 – t1 = 2 – 1 = 1
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 1 + (n – 1)1 = 1 + n – 1 = n
2, 3, 4 ………………… are in A.P.
Here a = 2, d = 3 – 2 = 1
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 2 + (n – 1)1 = 2 + n – 1 = n + 1
3, 4, 5 …………….. are in A.P.
Here a = 3, d = 4 – 3 = 1
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 3 + (n – 1)1 = 3 + n – 1 = n + 2
∴ The nth term in the given series is n(n + 1) (n + 2).
Let S(n) be the statement that
1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + ……………….. + n (n + 1) (n + 2) = \(\frac{n(n+1)(n+2)(n+3)}{4}\)
If n = 1 then
L.H.S = n(n + 1) (n + 2) = 1(1 + 1) (1 + 2) = 1.2.3 = 6
R.H.S = \(\frac{n(n+1)(n+2)(n+3)}{4}\) = \(\frac{1(1+1)(1+2)(1+3)}{4}\) = \(\frac{1.2 .3 .4}{4}\) = 6
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true Assume that s(k) is true
1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + ……………….. + k (k + 1) (k + 2) = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}(\mathrm{k}+1)(\mathrm{k}+2)(\mathrm{k}+3)}{4}\)
Adding (k + 1) (k + 2) (k + 3) on both sides we get
1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + …………….. + k (k + 1) (k + 2) + (k + 1) (k + 2) (k + 3)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 9
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
∴ By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 1.2.3 + 2.3.4 + 3.4.5 + ……………… + n(n + 1) (n + 2) = \(\frac{n(n+1)(n+2)(n+3)}{4}\) ∀ n ∈ N.

Question 9.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N,
\(\frac{1^3}{1}+\frac{1^3+2^3}{1+3}+\frac{1^3+2^3+3^3}{1+3+5}\) + ……………….. upto n terms = \(\frac{n}{24}\) [2n2 + 9n + 13]. [Mar. 14, 07, 05]
Answer:
Numerator: nth = 13 + 23 + 33 + …………. + n3 = Σn3 = \(\frac{n^2(n+1)^2}{4}\)

Denominator: 1 + 3 + 5 + ………………. are in A.P.
Here a = 1, d = 3 – 1 = 2
tn = a + (n – 1) d = 1 + (n – 1) 2 = 1 + 2n – 2 = 2n – 1
∴ nth term is
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 10
∴ L.H.S = R.H.S
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 11

Verification Method: \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{24}\) [2n2 + 9n + 13]
Put n = k + 1
= \(\frac{(\mathrm{k}+1)}{24}\) [2(k + 1)2 + 9 (k + 1) + 13] = \(\frac{(\mathrm{k}+1)}{24}\) [2k2 + 2 + 4k + 9k + 9 + 13]
= \(\frac{1}{24}\) [2k3 + 2k + 4k2 + 9k2 + 9k + 13k + 2k2 + 2 + 4k + 9k + 9 + 13] = \(\frac{1}{24}\) [2k3 + 15k2 + 37k + 24]
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 12

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 10.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 12 + (12 + 22) + (12 + 22 + 32) + ……….. upto n terms = \(\frac{n(n+1)^2(n+2)}{12}\).
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 13

Question 11.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 2 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ……… upto n terms
Answer:
2.1 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ………………… upto n terms = n . 2n
2, 3, 4 ………….. are in A.P.
Here a = 2, d = 3 – 2 = 1
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 2 + (n – 1)1 = 2 + n – 1 = n + 1
1, 2, 22, ……………… are in G.P.
Here a = 1, r = \(\frac{2}{1}\) = 2
tn = a . rn – 1 = 1 . 2n – 1 = 2n – 1
∴ The nth term in the given series is (n + 1) (2n – 1).
Let S(n) be the statement that
2.1 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ……….. + (n + 1) 2n – 1 = n . 2n
If n = 1, then
L.H.S. = (n + 1)2n – 1 = (1 + 1) 21 – 1 = 2.20 = 2.1 = 2
R.H.S. = n . 2n = 1.21 = 2
∴ LHS = RHS
∴ S(1) is true.
[(n + 1)2n – 1
put n = k + 1
(k + 1 + 1) 2k + 1 – 1
(k + 2) . 2k]
Assume that S(k) is true.
2.1 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ……….. + (k + 1)2k – 1 = k . 2k
Adding (k + 2) . 2k on both sides, we get
2.1 + 3.2 + 4.22 + ………… + (k + 1) 2k – 1 + (k + 2) 2k = k. 2k + (k + 2) . 2k = 2k (k + k + 2)
= 2k (2k + 2) = 2k . 2 (k + 1) = (k + 1) . 2k + 1
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
∴ By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
2.1 + 3.2 + 4. 22 + ……………… + (n + 1) 2n – 1 = n . 2n, ∀ n ∈ N.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 12.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 49n + 16n – 1 is divisible by 64 for all positive integer n. [Mar. 18 (TS); Mar. 17 (AP); May 13, 05, 98, 93]
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that f(n) = 49n + 16n – 1 is divisible by 64.
If n = 1, then
f(1) = 491 + 16.1 – 1 = 49 + 16 – 1 = 49 + 15 = 64 = 64 × 1 is divisible by 64
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
f(k) is divisible by 64 ⇒ 49k + 16k – 1 is divisible by 64
⇒ 49k + 16k – 1 = 64 M for some integer M ⇒ 49k = 64M – 16k + 1
Now
f(k + 1) = 49k + 1 + 16 (k + 1) – 1 = 49k. 49 + 16k + 16 – 1 = (64M – 16k + 1) 49 + 16k + 15
= 64.49M – 784k + 49 + 16k + 15 = 64.49M – 768k + 64
= 64(49M – 12k + 1) is divisible by 64. [ ∵ 49M – 12k + 1 is an integer]
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 49n + 16n – 1 is divisible by 64, ∀ n ∈ N.

Question 15.
By using mathematical induction show that 3 ∙ 52n + 1 + 23n + 1 is divisible by 17 ∀ n ∈ N. [May 12, 10, 08, 01, ’96]
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that f(n) = 3 . 52n + 1 + 23n + 1 is divisible by 17.
If n = 1, then
f(1) = 3.52.1 + 1 + 23.1 + 1 = 3.53 + 24 = 3(125) + 16 = 375 + 16 = 391 = 17 × 23 is divisible by 17
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
∴ f(k) is divisible by 17.
⇒ 3.52k + 1 + 23k + 1 is divisible by 17.
⇒ 3.52k + 1 + 23k + 1 = 17 M for some integer M.
⇒ 3.52k + 1 = 17M – 23k + 1
Now f (k + 1) = 3 . 52(k + 1) + 1 + 23(k + 1) + 1 = 3.52k + 2 + 1 + 23k + 3 + 1
= 3.52k + 1 . 52 + 23k + 1 . 23
= (17M – 23k + 1) 25 + 8 . 23k + 1 = 17.25 M – 25.23k + 1 + 8 . 23k + 1
= 17.25 M – 17.23k + 1
= 17 (25 M – 23k + 1) is divisible by 17. [∵ 25M – 23k + 1 is an integer]
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 3 . 52n + 1 + 23n + 1 is divisible by 17, ∀ n ∈ N.

Question 14.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, xn – yn is divisible by x – y. [May 04]
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that f(n) = xn – yn is divisible by (x – y).
If n = 1 then
f(1) = x1 – y1 = x – y = (x – y) × 1 is divisible by (x – y)
∴ S(l) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
f(k) is divisible by (x – y).
⇒ xk – yk is divisible by (x – y)
⇒ xk – yk = (x – y) M, for some integer M.
⇒ xk = (x – y) M + yk
Now
f(k + 1) = xk + 1 – yk + 1 = xk . x – yk . y = [(x – y) M + yk] x – yk . y = (x – y) . M x + yk . x – yk . y
= (x – y) M x + yk (x – y) = (x – y) [Mx + yk] is divisible by (x – y).
[Mx + yk] is an integer.
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ xn – yn is divisible by (x – y), ∀ n ∈ N.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Some More Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 1.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N, 43 + 83+ 123 + ……………. upto n terms = 16n2 (n + 1)2.
Answer:
4, 8, 12, are in A.P.
Here a = 4, d = t2 – t1 = 8 – 4 = 4
tn = a + (n – 1)d = 4 + (n – 1)4 = 4 + 4n – 4 = 4n
∴ The nth term in the given series is (4n)3 = 64n3
Let S(n) be the statement that 43 + 83 + 123 + …………….. + 64n3 = 16n2 (n + 1)2
If n = 1, then
LHS = 64n3 = 64(1)3 = 64
RHS = 16n2 (n + 1)2 = 16.12 (1 +!)2 = 16.1.4 = 64
∴ LHS = RHS
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
43 + 83 + 123 + ………………….. + 64k3 = 16k2 (k + 1)2
Adding 64(k + 1)3 on both sides, we get
43 + 83 + 123 + …………….. + 64k3 + 64(k + 1)3 = 16k2 (k + 1)2 + 64 (k + 1)3 = 16(k + 1)2 [k2 + 4 (k + 1)]
= 16(k + 1)2 [k2 + 4k + 4] = 16(k + 1)2 (k + 2)2 = 16(k + 1)2 (k + 1 + 1)2
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction, S(n) is true ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 43 + 83 + 123 + ………………. + 64n3 = 16n2 (n + 1)2, ∀ n ∈ N.

Question 2.
By using mathematical induction show that ∀ n ∈ N. 2.42n + 1 + 33n + 1 is divisible by 11.
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that f(n) = 2.42n + 1 + 33n + 1 is divisible by 11.
If n = 1, then
f(1) = 2.42.1 + 1 + 33.1 + 1 = 2.43 + 34 = 2(64) + 81
= 128 + 81 = 209 = 11 × 19 is divisible by 11.
∴ S(1) is true.
Assume that S(k) is true.
∴ f(k) is divisible by 11.
⇒ 2.42k + 1 + 33k + 1 is divisible by 11
⇒ 2.42k + 1 + 33k + 1 = 11 M, for some integer M
⇒ 2.42k + 1 = 11 M – 33k + 1
Now f(k + 1) = 2.42(k + 1) + 1 + 33(k + 1) + 1 = 2.42k + 2 + 1 + 33k + 3 + 1 = 2.42k + 1 . 42 + 33k + 1 . 33
= (11 M – 33k + 1) 16 + 27. 33k + 1 = 11.16 M – 16. 33k + 1 + 27.33k + 1 = 11.16M + 11.33k + 1
= 11(16 M + 33k + 1) is divisible by 11 (∵ 16 M + 33k + 1 is an integer)
∴ S(k + 1) is true.
By the principle of mathematical induction S(n) is true, ∀ n ∈ N.
∴ 2.42n + 1 + 33n + 1 is divisible by 11, ∀ n ∈ N.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions

Question 3.
Using mathematical induction prove that statement for all ∀ n ∈ N,
\(\left(1+\frac{3}{1}\right)\left(1+\frac{5}{4}\right)\left(1+\frac{7}{9}\right) \ldots\left(1+\frac{2 n+1}{n^2}\right)\) = (n + 1)2
Answer:
Let S(n) be the statement that \(\left(1+\frac{3}{1}\right)\left(1+\frac{5}{4}\right)\left(1+\frac{7}{9}\right) \ldots\left(1+\frac{2 n+1}{n^2}\right)\) = (n + 1)2
If n = 1, then
LHS = 1 + \(\frac{2 n+1}{n^2}\) = 1 + \(\frac{2.1+1}{(1)^2}\) = 1 + \(\frac{2+1}{1}\) = 1 + 3 = 4
RHS = (n + 1)2 = (1 + 1)2 = (2)2 = 4
∴ LHS = RHS
∴ S(1) = is true
Assume that S(k) is true
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Mathematical Induction Important Questions 14

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Gravitation Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 9th Lesson Gravitation

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
State the unit and dimension of universal gravitational constant (G).
Answer:
Units of G = N-m² / kg².
Dimensional formula = M-1 L³ T-2.

Question 2.
State the vector form of Newton’s law of gravitation.
Answer:
Vector form of Newton’s Law of gravitation is \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}=\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_1 \mathrm{~m}_2 \overline{\mathrm{r}}}{\overline{\mathbf{r}}^3}\)

Question 3.
If the gravitational force of the Earth on the Moon is F. What is the gravitational force of the moon on the earth? Do these forces form an action-reaction pair?
Answer:
Gravitational force between earth and moon and moon and earth are same
i-e., FEM = – FME

Gravitational force between the bodies are treated as action-reaction pair.

Question 4.
What would be the change in acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface, if the radius of Earth decreases by 2% keeping the mass of Earth constant?
Answer:
Acceleration due to gravity, g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\)
When mass is kept as constant and radius
is decreased by 2% then \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}}\) × 100 = 2

From distribution of errors in multiplications and divisions \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{g}}\) × 100 = -2\(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{R}}\) × 100

% Change in g = – 2 × 2 = – 4% – ve sign indicates that when R decreases ‘g’ increases.

Question 5.
As we go from one planet to another, how will a) the mass and b) the weight of a body change?
Answer:

  1. As we go from one planet to another planet mass of the body does not change. Mass of a body is always constant.
  2. As we move from one planet to another planet weight of the body gradually decreases. It become weightless. When we approaches the other planet the weight will gradually increases.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 6.
Keeping the length of a simple pendulum constant, will the time period to be the same on all planets? Support your answer with reason.
Answer:
Even though length of pendulum / is same the time period of oscillation T value changes from planet to planet.
Time period of pendulum, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
i.e., T depends on l and g.

Acceleration due to gravity, (g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\)) changes from planet to planet.

Hence Time period of pendulum changes even though length ‘l’ is same.

Question 7.
Give the equation for the value of g at a depth ‘d’ from the surface of Earth. What is the value of ‘g’ at the centre of Earth?
Answer:
Acceleration due to gravity at a depth ‘d’ below the ground is, gd = g(1 – \(\frac{D}{R}\))
Acceleration due to gravity at centre of earth is zero. (Since D = R)

Question 8.
What are the factors that make ‘g’ the least at the equator and maximum at the poles?
Answer:
‘g’ is least at equator due to
1) The equatorial radius of earth is maximum ∵ g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\) (∵ R = maximum)

2) Due to rotation of earth centrifugal force will act on the bodies. It opposes gravitational pull of earth on the bodies. At equator centrifugal force is maximum. So ‘g’ value is least at equator.
The g’ ⇒ maximum at poles due to

1) The polar radius of earth is minimum
(∵ g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\))

2) Centrifugal force due to rotation of earth is zero at poles. This centrifugal force reduces earth’s gravitational pull.

Since Centrifugal force is zero, ‘g’ value is maximum at poles.

Question 9.
“Hydrogen is in abundance around the sun but not around earth”. Explain.
Answer:
The escape velocity on the sun is very high compared to that on the earth. The gravitational pull of the sun is very large because of its larger mass compared to that of the earth. So it is very difficult for hydrogen to escape from the Sun’s atmosphere. Hence hydrogen is abundant on sun.

Question 10.
What is the time period of revolution of a geostationary satellite? Does it rotate from West to East or from East to West?
Answer:
Time period of geostationary satellite is equal to time period of rotation of earth.

∴ Time period of geostationary orbit T = 24 hours. Satellites in geostationary orbit will revolve round the earth in west to east direction in an equatorial plane.

Derive the relation between acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface of a planet and Gravitational constant (G).

Question 11.
What are polar satellites?
Answer:
Polar satellite :
Polar satellites are low altitude satellites. They will revolve around the poles of the earth in a north-south direction. Time period of polar satellites is nearly 100 minutes.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Kepler’s Laws of planetary motion. [TS Mar. ’17]
Answer:
Kepler’s Laws :
Law of orbits (1st law):
All planets will move in elliptical orbits with the sun lies at one of its foci.

Law of areas (2nd law) :
The line that joins any planet to the sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time, i.e., \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{A}}{\Delta \mathrm{T}}\)= constant. i.e., planets will appear to move slowly when they are away from sun, and they will move fast when they are nearer to sun.

Law of periods (3rd law) :
The square of time period of revolution of a planet is proportional to the cube of the semi major axis of the ellipse traced out by the planet.
i.e., T² ∝ R³ or \(\frac{T^2}{R^3}\) = constant

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 2.
Derive the relation between acceleration due to gravity (g) at the surface of a planet and Gravitational constant (G).
Answer:
Relation between g and G :
Each and everybody was attracted towards centre of earth with some force. This is called weight of the body,
W = mg …………. (1)

This force is due to gravitational pull on the body by the earth.

For small distances above earth from centre of earth is equal to radius of earth ‘R’.

According to Newton’s law of gravitation.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 1

Question 3.
How does the acceleration due to gravity (g) change for the same values of height (h) and depth(d)?
Answer:
Variation of ‘g’ with altitude :
When we go to a height ‘h’ above the ground ‘g’ value decreases.
On surface of earth (g) = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\)
At an altitude ‘h’ g(h) = \(\frac{GM}{(R+h)^{2}}\) because

R + h is the distance from centre of earth to the given point at ‘h’.
h << R ⇒ g(h) = g(1 – \(\frac{2h}{R}\))
So acceleration due to gravity decreases with height above the ground.

Variation of ‘g’ with depth :
When we go deep into the ground ‘g’ value decreases.

At a depth ‘d’ inside the ground mass of earth upto the point d from centre will exhibit force of attraction on the body. The remaining mass does not exhibit any influence. So effective radius is (R – d) only. Acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ at a depth ‘d’ is given by
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 2

So ‘g’ value decreases with depth below the ground.

Question 4.
What is orbital velocity? Obtain an expression for it. [AP Mar. 17, 14; May 18. 14]
Answer:
Orbital velocity (V0) :
Velocity of a satellite moving in the orbit is called orbital velocityog.

Let a satellite of mass m is revolving round the earth in a circular orbit at a height ‘h’ above the ground.

Radius of the orbit = R + h where R is radius of earth.

In orbital motion is “The centrifugal and centripetal forces acting on the satellite”.

Centrifugal force = \(\frac{mV^2}{r}=\frac{mV^{2}_{0}}{R+h}\) ……… (1)
(In this case V = V0 and r = R + h)

Centripetal force is the force acting towards the centre of the circle it is provided by gravitational force between the planet and satellite.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 3

V0 = \(\sqrt{gR}\) is called orbital velocity. Its value is 7.92 km/sec.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 5.
What is escape velocity? Obtain an expression for it. [TS Mar. ’19, ’16; AP Mar. ’19. ’18, ’15, ’13. May ’17, ’16]
Answer:
Escape speed (v1)min :
It is defined as the minimum velocity required by a body to overcome gravitational field of earth is known as escape velocity.

For a body of mass ‘m’ gravitational potential energy on surface of earth PE = – \(\frac{G.m.M_E}{R_E}\)

For a body to escape from gravitational field of earth its kinetic energy must be equal or more than gravitational potential energy.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 4

Question 6.
What is a geostationary satellite? State [AP Mar. ’16, June ’15; May ’13; TS Mar. ’18, ’15, May ’18, ’16, June ’15]
Answer:
A geostationary satellite will always appears to be stationary relative to earth.

The time period of geostationary satellite is equals to time perfod of rotation of earth.

∴ Time period of geostationary orbit t = 24 hours. Satellites in geostationary orbit will revolve round the earth in west to east direction in an equatorial plane.

Uses of geostationary satellites:

  1. For study of the upper layers of the atmosphere.
  2. For forecasting the changes in atmosphere and weather.
  3. For finding the size and shape of earth.
  4. For investigating minerals and ores present in the earth’s crust.
  5. For transmission of T.V. signals.
  6. For study of transmission of radio waves.
  7. For space research.

Question 7.
If two places are at the same height from the mean sea level; One is a mountain and other is in air. At which place will ‘g’ be greater? State the reason for your answer.
Answer:
‘g’ value on the mountain is greater than g’ value in air even though both are at same height.

For a point on mountain while deciding the ‘g’ value, mass of mountain is also considered which leads to change in ‘g’ value depending on local condition such as concentration of huge mass at a particular place. Whereas for a point in air no such effect is considered. Hence ‘g’ on the top of mountain is more.

Question 8.
The weight of an object is more at the poles than at the equator. At which of these can we get more sugar for the same weight? State the reason for your answer.
Answer:
If we are using common balance to measure sugar we will get some quantity of sugar both at equator and at poles.

Whereas if we are using spring balance to weigh sugar then weight of sugar at poles is more. So we will get less quantity.

Weight of sugar at equator is less. So we will get more quantity of sugar at equator.

Question 9.
If a nut becomes loose and gets detached from a satellite revolving around the earth, will it fall down to earth or will it revolve around earth? Give reasons for your answer.
Answer:
If a nut is detached from a satellite revolving in the orbit then its velocity is equals to orbital velocity. So it continues to revolve in the same orbit. It does not fall to earth.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 10.
An object projected with a velocity greater than or equal to 11.2 km.s-1 will not return to earth. Explain the reason.
Answer:
Escape velocity of earth is 11.2 km/sec. If any body acquires a velocity of 11.2 km/ sec. or more its kinetic energy is more than gravitational potential energy. So earth is not able to stop the motion of that body. So any body with a velocity 11.2 km/s or more will escape from gravitational field of earth and never comes back to earth.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define gravitational potential energy and derive an expression for it associated with two particles of masses m1 and m2.
Answer:
Gravitational potential energy of a body at a point in a gravitational field of another. It is defined as the amount of work done in brining the given body from infinity to that point in the field is called Gravitational potential energy.

Expression for gravitational potential energy :
Consider two particles of masses m, and m2 are placed at the points O’ and p respectively. Let the distance between the two particles is r’ i.e., OP = r.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 5

Let us calculate the gravitational potential energy of the particle of mass m2 placed at point p in the gravitational field of m1. Join OP and extended it in forward direction. Consider two points A and B on this line such that OA = x and AB = dx.

The gravitational force of attraction on the particle at A is, F = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm_1m_2}}{\mathrm{x^2}}\)

Small amount of work done in bringing the particle without acceleration through a very small distance AB is, dW = F dx
= \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm_1m_2}}{\mathrm{x^2}}\)

Total workdone in bringing the particle from infinity to the point P is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 6

Since, this work done is stored in the particle as its gravitational potential energy (U). Therefore, gravitational potential energy of the particle of mass m2 placed at point p’ in the gravitational field of particle of mass
m1 at distance r is, U = \(\frac{\mathrm{-Gm_1m_2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)

Here, negative sign shows that the potential energy is due to attractive gravitational force between two particles.

Question 2.
Derive an expression for the variation of acceleration due to gravity (a) above and (h) below the surface of the Earth.
Answer:
Variation of acceleration due to gravity above the surface of earth :
We know ‘g’ on planet, g = \(\frac{GM}{R^2}\). But on earth g’ value changes with height above the ground h’.

Variation of ‘g’ with altitude :
For a point h’ above the earth total mass of earth seems to be concentrated at centre of earth. Now distance from centre of earth is (R + h).
Acceleration due to gravity at ‘h’ = g(h)
= \(\frac{GM_E}{(R_E+h)^2}\)

For small values of ‘h’ i.e., h << R than
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 7

Variation of acceleration due to gravity below the surface of earth :
At a depth d’ inside the ground mass of earth upto the point d from centre will exhibit force of attraction on the body. The remaining mass does not exhibit any influence.
Mass of spherical body M ∝ R³

∴ MS/ME = (RE – d)³/ R³E where Ms is mass of earth’s shell upto a depth ‘d’ from centre. Gravitational force at depth ‘d’ is
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 8
So ‘g’ value decreases with depth below the ground.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 3.
State Newton’s Universal Law of Gravitation. Explain how the value of the Gravitational constant (G) can be determined by Cavendish method.
Answer:
Newton’s law of gravitation :
Every body in the universe attracts every other body with a force which is directly proportional to theproduct of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 9

This is always a force of attraction and acts along the line joining the two bodies.

Cavendish experiment to find gravitational constant ‘G’ :
Cavendish experiment consists of a long metalic rod AB to which two small lead spheres of mass ‘m’ are attached.

This rod is suspended from a rigid support with the help of a thin wire. Two heavy spheres of mass M are brought near to these small spheres in opposite direction. Then gravitational force will act between the spheres.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 10

Force between the spheres, r = \(\frac{GMm}{d^2}\)

Two equal and opposite forces acting at the two ends of the rod AB will develop force couple and the rod will rotate through an angle ‘θ’.
∴ Torque on the rod F × L = \(\frac{GM.m}{d^2}\) → (1)
Restoring force couple = τθ → (2)
Where τ = Restoring couple per unit twist
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 11
By measuring 0 we can calculate ‘G’ value when other parameters are known. Practical value of G is 6.67 × 10-11 Nm²/kg².

Problems

(Gravitational Constant ‘G’ = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm²kg-2; Radius of earth ‘R’ = 6400 km; Mass of earth ‘ME‘ = 6 × 1024 kg)

Question 1.
Two spherical balls each of mass 1 kg are placed 1 cm apart. Find the gravitational force of attraction between them.
Solution:
Mass of each ball, m = 1 kg;
Separation, r = 1 cm = 10-2 m
Gravitational force of attraction,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 12

Question 2.
The mass of a ball is four times the mass of another ball. When these balls are separated by a distance of 10 cm, the gravitational force between them is 6.67 × 10-7 N. Find the masses of the two balls.
Solution:
Mass of 1st ball = m;
Mass of 2nd ball = 4m.
Separation, r = 10 cm = 0.1 m;
Mass of the 1st ball = m = ?
Gravitational force, F = 6.67 × 10-7 N
∴ Mass of the balls are 5 kg, 20 kg.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 13

Question 3.
Three spherical balls of masses 1 kg, 2 kg and 3 kg are placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side 1 m. Find the magnitude of the gravitational force exerted by the 2 kg and 3 kg masses on the 1 kg mass.
Solution:
Side of equilateral triangle, a = lm.
Masses at corners = 1 kg, 2 kg, 3 kg.
Force between 1 kg, 2g = F1 = G.\(\frac{2\times1}{1^2}\) = 2 G
Force between I kg, 3kg = F2 = G.\(\frac{3\times1}{1^2}\)= 3G.
Now F1 & F2 act with an angle of 60°
∴ Resultant force
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 14

Question 4.
At a certain height above the earth’s surface, the acceleration due to gravity is 4% of its value at the surface of the earth. Determine the height.
Solution:
Acceleration due.to gravity at a height, h = 4% of g.
Radius of earth, R = 6400K.M. = 6.4 × 106m.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 15

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 5.
A satellite orbits the earth at a height of 1000 km. Find its orbital speed.
Solution:
Radius of earth, R = 6,400 km = 6.4 × 106 m;
Mass of earth, M = 6 × 1024
Height of satellite h = 1000 km;
G = 6.67 × 1011 N – m² /kg²
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 16

Question 6.
A satellite orbits the earth at a height equal to the radius of earth. Find it’s (i) orbital speed and (ii) Period of revolution.
Solution:
Radius of earth, R = 6400 k.m.;
-height above earth, h = R.
Mass of earth, M = 6 × 1024
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N – m²/kg²
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 17

Question 7.
The gravitational force of attraction between two objects decreases by 36% when the distance between them is increased by 4 m. Find the original distance between them.
Solution:
Let force between the objects = F;
Distance between them = r.
For Case II distance, r1 = (r + 4);
New force, F1 = 36% less than F
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 18
⇒ 100 r² = 64 (r + 4)² Take square roots on both sides.
10r = 8 (r + 4) ⇒ 10 r = 8r + 32
⇒ (10 – 8) r = 2r = 32
∴ r = 16 m.

Question 8.
Four identical masses m are kept at the corners of a square of side a. Find the gravitational force exerted on one of the masses by the other masses.
Solution:
Given all masses are equal
∴ m1 = m2 = m3 = m4
Force between m1, m4 = F1 = \(\frac{G.m^2}{a^2}\) ……… (1)
Force between m4, m3 = F2 = \(\frac{G.m^2}{a^2}\) ……… (2)
Forces F1 and F2 act perpendicularly.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 19
Their magnitudes are equal.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 20

Now forces FR and F3 are like parallel. So resultant is sum of these forces.
Total force at m4 due to other masses
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 21

Question 9.
Two spherical balls of 1 kg and 4 kg are separated by a distance of 12 cm. Find the distance of a point from the 1 kg mass at which the gravitational force on any mass becomes zero.
Solution:
Mass, m1 = 1 kg ; Mass, m2 = 4 kg ;
Separation, d = 12 cm
Mass of 3rd body m3 = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 22
For m3 not to experience any force the condition is
Force between m1, m3 = Force between m2, m3.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 23
Take square roots on both sides,
d – x = 2x ⇒ d = 3x or x = \(\frac{12}{3}\) = 4 cm
∴ Distance from 1 kg mass = 4 cm

Question 10.
Three uniform spheres each of mass m and radius R are kept in such a way that each touches the other two. Find the magnitude of the gravitational force on any one of the spheres due to the other two.
Solution:
Mass m and radius R are same for all spheres.
Force between 1, 3 spheres = F1 = \(\frac{G.m^2}{(2R)^2}\)
Force between 1, 2 spheres = F2 = \(\frac{G.m^2}{(2R)^2}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 24
Now F1 and F2 will act with an angle θ = 60° between them so from Parallelogram law
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 25

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 11.
Two satellites are revolving round the earth at different heights. The ratio of their orbital speeds is 2 : 1. If one of them is at a height of 100 km what is the height of the other satellite?
Solution:
Mass of earth, m = 6 × 1020 kg ;
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N-m² / kg²
Ratio of orbital velocities V01 : V02 = 2 : 1;
Height of one satellite, h = 100 k.m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 26

4R + 4h2 = R + h1 ⇒ h1 = 3R + 4h2. ;
Put h2 = 100 km
∴ h1 = 3 × 6400 + 400 = 19600 km.

Question 12.
A satellite is revolving round in a circular orbit with a speed of 8 km/ s-1 at a height where the value of acceleration due to gravity is 8 m/s-2. How high is the satellite from the Earth’s surface? (Radius of planet 6000 km.).
Solution:
Orbital velocity of satellite, V0 = 8 km/s.
= 8 × 10³ m/s.
Acceleration due to gravity in the orbit = g
= 8 m/s²

Orbital velocity, V = \(\sqrt{gR}\)
where R is radius of the orbit and g is acceleration due to gravity in the orbit.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 27

Height of satellite = 8000 – radius of earth ;
Radius of earth = 6000 km.
∴ Height above earth = 8000 – 6000
= 2000 km.

Question 13.
(a) Calculate the escape velocity of a body from the Earth’s surface, (b) If the Earth were made of wood, its mass would be 10% of its current mass. What would be the escape velocity, if the Earth were made of wood?
Solution:
Radius of earth, R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m.
Mass of earth, M = 6 × 1024 kg; g = 9.8 ms-2.
a) Escape velocity, Ve = \(\sqrt{2gR}\)
∴ Ve = \(\sqrt{2\times9.8\times6.4\times10^6}\) = 11.2 km/s

b) If earth is made of wood mass,
M1 = 10% of M = 6 × 1023
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 28

Additional Problems

Question 1.
A comet orbits the Sun in a highly elliptical orbit. Does the comet have a constant (a) linear speed (b) angular speed (c) angular momentum (d) kinetic energy (e) potential energy (f) total energy throughout its orbit? Neglect any mass loss of the comet when it comes very close to the Sun.
Solution:
A comet while going on elliptical orbit around the Sun has constant angular momentum and total energy at all locations but other quantities vary with locations.

Question 2.
A Saturn year is 29.5 times the earth year. How far is the Saturn from the sun if the earth is 1.5 × 108 km away from the sun? Solution:
Here, Ts = 29.5 Te; Re = 1.5 × 108 km; Rs = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 29

Question 3.
A body weighs 63 N on the surface of Earth. What is the gravitational force on it due to the Earth at a height equal to half the radius of the Earth?
Solution:
Weight of body = mg = 63 N
At height h, the value of g’ is given by,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 30

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation

Question 4.
Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density, how much would a body weigh half way down to the centre of earth if it weighed 250 N on the surface?
Solution:
Weight of body at a depth, d = mg’
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 9 Gravitation 31

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 8th Lesson Oscillations Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 8th Lesson Oscillations

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Give two examples of periodic motion which are not oscillatory.
Answer:

  1. Motion of seconds hand of a watch.
  2. Motion of fan blades which are rotating with constant angular velocity ‘w’.

For these two cases, they have constant centrifugal acceleration which does not change with rotation so it is not considered

Question 2.
The displacement in S.H.M. is given by y = a sin (20t + 4). What is the displacement when it is increased by2π/ω?
Answer:
Displacement :
Displacement remains constant ; \(\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}\) = time period T. After a time (0
period T, there is no change in equation of S.H.M.
i.e. Y = A sin (20t + 4) = Y = A sin (201 + 4 + T)
∴ There is no change in change in displacement.

Question 3.
A girl is swinging seated in a swing. What is the effect on the frequency of oscillation if she stands?
Answer:
The frequency of oscillation (n) will increase because in the standing position, the location of centre of mass of the girl shift upwards. Due to it, the effective length of the swing decreases. As n ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{l}}\), therefore, n increases.

Question 4.
The bob of a simple pendulum is a hollow sphere filled with water. How will the period of oscillation change, if the water begins to drain out of the hollow sphere?
Answer:
When water begins to drain out of the sphere, the centre of mass of the system will first move down and then will come up to the initial position. Due to this the equivalent length of the pendulum and hence time period first increases, reaches a maximum value and then decreases till it becomes equal to its initial value.

Question 5.
The bob of a simple pendulum is made of wood. What will be the effect on the time period if the wooden bob is replaced by an identical bob of aluminum?
Answer:
The time period of a simple pendulum does not change, if the wooden bob is replaced by an identical bob of aluminium because the time period of a simple pendulum is independent of the material of the bob.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 6.
Will a pendulum clock gain or lose time when taken to the top of a mountain?
Answer:
At higher altitudes i.e., on mountains the acceleration due to gravity is less as compared on the surface of earth. Since time period is inversely proportional to the square root of the acceleration due to gravity, the time period increases. The pendulum clock loses time on the top of a mountain.

Question 7.
What is the length of a simple pendulum which ticks seconds? (g = 9.8 ms-2) [AP Mar. ’18: TS Mar. ’15]
Answer:
In simple pendulum T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) or l = \(\sqrt{\frac{gt^2}{4\pi^2}}\)
For seconds pendulum T = 2s ⇒ t² = 4
∴ = \(\frac{9.8\times4}{4\pi^2}\) = 1 m (∴ π² nearly 9.8)

Question 8.
What happens to the time period of a simple pendulum if its length is increased upto four times?
Answer:
In simple pendulum Time period T ∝ √l
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 1
From the above equation time period is doubled.

Question 9.
A pendulum clock gives correct time at the equator. Will it gain or lose time if it is taken to the poles? If so, why?
Answer:
When a pendulum clock showing correct time at equator is taken to poles then it will gain time.

Acceleration due to gravity at poles is high. Time period of pendulum T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\).

When g increases T decreases. So number of oscillations made in the given time increases hence clock gains time.

Question 10.
What fraction of the total energy is K.E when the displacement is one half of a amplitude of a particle executing S.H.M?
Answer:
Kinetic energy is equal to three fourth (i.e.,\(\frac{3}{4}\)) of the total energy, when the displacement is one-half of its amplitude.

Question 11.
What happens to the energy of a simple harmonic oscillator if its amplitude is doubled?
Answer:
Energy of a simple harmonic oscillator,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 2
From the above equation, energy increases by four times.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 12.
Can a simple pendulum be used in an artificial satellite? Give the reason
Answer:
No, this is because inside the satellite, there is no gravity, i.e., g = 0. As T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) where T = ∞ for g = 0. Thus, the simple pendulum will not oscillate.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define simple harmonic motion? Give two examples.
Answer:
Simple Harmonic Motion :
A body is said to be in S.H.M, if its acceleration is directly proportional to its displacement, acts opposite in direction towards a fixed point.

Examples:

  1. Projection of uniform circular motion on a diameter.
  2. Oscillations of simple pendulum with small amplitude.
  3. Oscillations of a loaded spring.
  4. Vibrations of a liquid column in U – tube.

Question 2.
Present graphically the variations of displacement, velocity and acceleration with time for a particle in S.H.M.
Answer:
The variations of displacement, velocity and acceleration with time for a particle in S.H.M can be represented graphically as shown in the figure.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 3

From the graph

  1. All quantities vary sinusoidally with time.
  2. only their maxima differ and the different plots differ in phase.
  3. Displacement x varies between – A to A; v(t) varies from – ωA to ωA and a (t) varies from – ω²A to ω²A.
  4. With respect to displacement plot, velocity plot has a phase difference of \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) and acceleration plot has a phase difference of π.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 3.
What is phase? Discuss the phase relations between displacement, velocity and acceleration in simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
Phase (θ) :
Phase is defined as its state or condition as regards its position and direction of motion at that instant.
In S.H.M phase angle, θ = ωt = 2π(\(\frac{t}{T}\))

a) Phase between velocity and displacement :
In S.H.M, displacement,
y = A sin (ωt – Φ)
Velocity, V = Aω cos (ωt – Φ)
So phase difference between displacement and velocity is 90°.

b) Phase between displacement and acceleration :
In S.H.M, acceleration ‘a’ = – ω²y
or y = A sin ωt and a = – ω² A sin ωt
– ve sign indicates that acceleration and displacement are opposite.

So phase difference between displacement and acceleration is 180°.

Question 4.
Obtain an equation for the frequency of oscillation of spring of force constant k to which a mass m is attached.
Answer:
Let a spring of negligible mass is suspended from a fixed point and mass m is attached as shown. It is pulled down by a small distance ‘x’ and allowed free it will execute simple harmonic oscillations.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 4

Displacement from mean position = x.
The restoring forces developed are opposite to displacement and proportional to ‘x’. ∴ F ∝ – x or F = – kx where k is constant of spring, (-ve sign for opposite direction)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 5

Question 5.
Derive expressions for the kinetic energy and potential energy of a simple harmonic oscillator.
Answer:
Expression for K.E of a simple harmonic oscillator :
The displacement of the body in S.H.M., X = A sin ωt
where A = amplitude, ωt = Angular displacement.

Velocity at any instant, v = \(\frac{dx}{dt}\) = Aω cos ωt
∴ K.E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv² = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mA²ω² cos² ωt
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 5
At mean position velocity is maximum and displacment x = 0
∴ K.Emax = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mA²ω²

Expression for P.E of a simple harmonic oscillator:
Let a body of mass m’ is in S.H.M with an amplitude A.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 6

Let O is the mean position.
Equation of a body in S.H.M is given by, x = A sin ωt
For a body in S.H.M acceleration, a = – ω²Y
Force, F = ma = – mω²x
∴ Restoring force, F = mω²x

Potential energy of the body at any point say ‘x’ :
Let the body is displaced through a small distance dx
Work done, dW = F . dx = P.E.
This work done.
∴ P.E = mω²x. dx(where x is its displacement)
Total work done, W = ∫dW = \(\int_0^x m \omega^2 x\).dx
⇒ Work done, W = \(\frac{m\omega^2x^2}{2}\).
This work is stored as potential energy.
∴ P.E at any point = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²x²

Question 6.
How does the energy of a simple pendulum vary as it moves from one extreme position to the other during its oscillations?
Answer:
The total energy of a simple pendulum is,
E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mA² (or) E = \(\frac{1}{2}\frac{mg}{l}\)A²

The above equation, shows that the total energy of a simple pendulum remains constant irrespective of the position at any time during the oscillation i.e., the law of conservation of energy is valid in the case of a simple pendulum. At the extreme positions P and Q the energy is completely in the form of potential energy and at the mean position 0 it is totally converted as kinetic energy.

At any other point the sum of the potential and kinetic energies is equal to the maximum kinetic energy at the mean position or maximum potential energy at the extreme position. As the bob of the pendulum moves from P to O, the potential energy decreases but appears in the same magnitude as kinetic energy. Similarly as the bob of the pendulum moves from 0 to P or Q, the kinetic energy decreases to the extent it is converted into potential energy, as shown in figure.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 7

Question 7.
Derive the expressions for displacement, velocity and acceleration of a particle executes S.H.M.
Answer:
Displacement of a body in S.H.M.
X = A cos (ωt + Φ).

i) Displacement (x) :
At t = 0 displacement x = A i.e., at extreme position when ωt + Φ = 90° displacement x = 0 at mean position at any point x = A cos (ωt + Φ).

ii) Velocity (V): Velocity of a body in S.H.M.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 8
When (ωt + Φ) = 0 then velocity v = 0. For points where (ωt + Φ) = 90°
Velocity V = – Aω i.e., velocity is maximum,

iii) Acceleration (a): Acceleration of a body in S.H.M. is a = \(\frac{dv}{dx}\)
= \(\frac{d}{dt}\)(-Aω sin(ωt + Φ) = -Aω²cos(ωt + Φ) = -ω²x)
amax = -ω²A

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define simple harmonic motion. Show that the motion of projection of a particle performing uniform circular motion, on any diameter is simple harmonic. [TS May 18, Mar. 16, June 15; AP Mar. ;19, 18, AP May 16, 14]
Answer:
Simple harmonic motion :
A body is said to be in S.H.M, if its acceleration is directly proportional to its displacement, acts opposite in direction towards a fixed point.

Relation between uniform circular motion and S.H.M.:
Let a particle ‘P’ is rotating in a circular path of radius ‘ω’ with a uniform angular velocity ‘P’. After time ‘t’ it goes to a new position ‘P’. Draw normals from ‘P’ on to the X – axis and on to the Y – axis. Let ON and OM are the projections on X and Y axis respectively.

As the particle is in motion it will subtend an angle θ = ωt at the centre.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 9

From triangle OPN
ON = OP cos θ
But OP = r and θ = ωt
∴ Displacement of particle P on X – axis at any time t is
X = r cos ωt ………… (1)
From triangle OPM
OM = Y = OP sin θ
But OP = r and θ = ωt
∴ Displacement of particle P on Y- axis is
Y = r sin ωt ………… (2)

As the particle rotates in a circular path the foot of the perpendiculars OM and ON will oscillate with in the limits X to X¹ and Y to Y¹.

At any point the displacement of particle P is given by OP² = OM² = ON²
Since OM = X = r cos ωt and ON = Y = r sin ωt.

So a uniform circular motion can be treated as a combination of two mutually perpendicular simple harmonic motions.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 2.
Show that the motion of a simple pendulum is simple harmonic and hence derive an equation for its time period. What is a seconds pendulum? [TS Mar. 18, 17, 15, May 17, 16; AP Mar. 17, 16. 15, 14, 13; AP May 18. 17. 13; June 15]
Answer:
Simple pendulum :
Massive metallic bob is suspended from a rigid support with the help of inextensable thread. This arrangement is known as simple pendulum.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 10

So length of simple pendulum is ‘l’. Let the pendulum is pulled to a side by a small angle ‘θ’ and released it oscillate about the mean position.

Let the bob is at one extreme position B. The weight (W = mg) of body acts vertically downwards.

By resolving the weight into two perpendicular components :

  1. One component mg sin θ is responsible for the to and fro motion of pendulum.
  2. Other component mg cos θ will balance the tension in the string.

Force useful for motion F = mg sin θ = ma (From Newton’s 2nd Law)
From the above equations
∴ a = g sin θ

Since acceleration is proportional to displacement and acceleration is always directed towards a fixed point the motion of simple pendulum is “simple harmonic”.

Time period of simple pendulum :
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 11
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 12

Seconds pendulum :
A pendulum whose time period is 2 seconds is called “seconds pendulum.”

Question 3.
Derive the equation for the kinetic energy and potential energy of a simple harmonic oscillator and show that the total energy of a particle in simple harmonic motion is constant at any point on its path.
Answer:
Expression for K.E of a simple harmonic oscillator :
The displacement of the body in S.H.M, X = A sin ωt
where A = amplitude and ωt = Angular displacement.

Velocity at any instant, v = \(\frac{dx}{dt}\) = Aω cos ωt
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 13

At mean position velocity is maximum and displacement x = 0
∴ K.Emax = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mA²ω²

Expression for P.E of a simple harmonic oscillator :
Let a body of mass’m’ is in S.H.M with an amplitude A.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 14

Let O is the mean position.
Equation of a body in S.H.M is given by, x = A sin ωt
For a body in S.H.M acceleration, a = – ω²Y
Force, F = ma = – mω²x
∴ Restoring force, F = mω²x

Potential energy of the body at any point say ‘x’:
Let the body is displaced through
a small distance dx
⇒ Work done, dW = F . dx
This work done = RE. in the body
∴ P.E = mω²x. dx(where x is its displacement)
Total work done, W = ∫dW = \(\int_0^x m \omega^2 x\).dx
work done, W = \(\frac{m\omega^2 x^2}{2}\)
This work is stored as potential energy.
∴ P.E at any point = \(\frac{1}{2}\)ω²x²
For conservative force total Mechanical Energy at any point = E= P.E + K.E
∴ Total energy,
E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²(A² – x²) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²x²
E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²{A² – x² + x²} = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²A²

So for a body in S.H.M total energy at any point of its motion is constant and equals to \(\frac{1}{2}\)mω²A²

Problems

Question 1.
The bob of a pendulum is made of a hollow brass sphere. What happens to the time period of the pendulum, if the bob is filled with water completely? Why?
Solution:
If the hollow brass sphere is completely filled with water, then time period of simple pendulum does not change. This is because time period of a pendulum is independent of mass of the bob.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 2.
Two identical springs of force constant “k” are joined one at the end of the other On series). Find the effective force constant of the combination.
Solution:
When two springs of constant k each are joined together with end to end in series then effective spring constant k = \(\frac{k_1k_2}{k_1+k_2}\) in this case keq = \(\frac{k.k}{k+k}=\frac{k}{2}\)

In series combination, force constant of springs decreases.

Question 3.
What are the physical quantities having maximum value at the mean position in SHM?
Solution:
In S.H.M at mean position velocity and kinetic energy will have maximum values.

Question 4.
A particle executes SHM such that, the maximum velocity during the oscillation is numerically equal to half the maximum acceleration. What is the time period? [TS June ’15]
Solution:
Given maximum velocity, Vmax = \(\frac{1}{2}\) maximum acceleration (amax)
But Vmax = Aw and amax = ω² A
∴ Aω = \(\frac{1}{2}\) . Aω² ⇒ ω = 2
Time period of the body, T = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}=\frac{2 \pi}{2}\)

Question 5.
A mass of 2 kg attached to a spring of force constant 260 Nm-1 makes 100 oscillations. What is the time taken?
Solution:
Mass attached, m = 2 kg ; Force constant, k = 260 N/m
∴ Time period of loaded spring, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)
= 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{2}{260}}\) = 0.5509 sec
∴ Time for 100 oscillations = 100 × 0.551
= 55.1 sec

Question 6.
A simple pendulum in a stationary lift has time period T. What would be the effect on the time period when the lift (i) moves up with uniform velocity (ii) moves down with uniform velocity (iii) moves up with uniform acceleration ‘a’ (iv) moves down with uniform acceleration ‘a’ (v) begins to fall freely under gravity?
Solution:
i) When the lift moves up with uniform velocity i.e., a = 0, there would be no change in the time period of a simple pendulum.

ii) When the lift moves down with uniform velocity i.e., a = 0, there would be no change in the time period of a simple pendulum.

iii) When lift is moving up with acceleration ‘a’ then relative acceleration = g + a
∴ Time period, T = 2 π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g+a}}\) so when lift is moving up with uniform acceleration time period of pendulum in it decreases.

iv) When lift is moving down with acceleration ‘a’ time period, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g-a}}\)
(g – a = relative acceleration of pendulum)
So time period of pendulum in the lift decreases.

v) If the lift falls freely, a = g then the time period of a simple pendulum becomes infinite.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 7.
A particle executing SHM has amplitude of 4cm, and its acceleration at a distance of 1cm from the mean position is 3cms-2. What will its velocity be when it is at a distance of 2cm from its mean position?
Solution:
Amplitude, A = 4cm = 4 × 10-2m
Acceleration, a = 3cm/s² = 3 × 10-2 m/s²;
Displacement, y = 1cm = 10-2 m
∴ Angular velocity, ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{a}{y}}=\sqrt{\frac{3}{1}}=\sqrt{3}\)

To find velocity at a displacement of 2cm
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 15

Question 8.
A simple harmonic oscillator has a time period of 2s. What will be the change in the phase after 0.25 s after leaving the mean position?
Solution:
Time period, T = 2 sec; time, t = 0.25 sec
Phase difference after t sec = Φ = \(\frac{t}{T}\) × 2π
= \(\frac{0.25}{2}\) × 2π = \(\frac{2 \pi}{4}\) = 90°
For a phase of \(\frac{2 \pi}{4}\) starting from mean position the body will be at extreme position. (Phase difference between mean position and extreme position is \(\frac{2 \pi}{4}\) Rad or 90°)

Question 9.
A body describes simple harmonic motion with an amplitude of 5 cm and a period of 0.2 s. Find the acceleration and velocity of the body when the displacement is (a) 5 cm (b) 3 cm (c) 0 cm.
Solution:
Given that, A = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2m and T = 0.2 s
Angular velocity, ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{T}=\frac{2 \pi}{0.2}\) = 10π rad s-1

a) Displacement, y = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2 m
i) Acceleration of the body, a = – ω²y
= -(10π)² × 5 × 10-2 = -5π²ms-2
ii) Velocity of the body,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 16

b) Displacement, y = 3 cm = 3 × 10-2 m
i) Acceleration of the body, a = – ω²y
= -(10π)² × 3 × 10-2 = -3π²ms-2
ii) Velocity of the body, v = ω\(\sqrt{A^2 – y^2}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 17
= 10π × 4 × 10-2 = 0.4π ms-1

c) Displacement, y = 0 cm
i) Acceleration of the body, a = – ω²y = 0
ii) Velocity of the body, v = ω\(\sqrt{A^2 – y^2}\)
= 10π^(5xl0’2)2-(0)2\(\sqrt{(5\times10^{-2})^2-(0)^2}\)
= 10π × 5 × 10-2 =0.5π ms-1

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 10.
The mass and radius of a planet are double that of the earth. If the time period of a simple pendulum on the earth is T, find the time period on the planet.
Solution:
Mass of planet, MP = 2 Me ;
Radius of planet, RP = 2Re
Time period of pendulum on earth = T ;
Time period on planet = T’
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 18

Question 11.
Calculate the change in the length of a simple pendulum of length lm, when its period of oscillation changes from 2 s to 1.5 s. [TS Mar. ’18]
Solution:
For seconds pendulum T1 = 2 sec ;
Length l1 = 1 m.
New time period T2 = 1.5 sec; Length l2 = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 19

Question 12.
A freely falling body takes 2 seconds to reach the ground on a plane, when it is dropped from a height of 8m. If the period of a simple pendulum is seconds on the planet. Calculate the length of the pendulum.
Solution:
Height, h = 8m;
Time taken to reach the ground, t = 2 sec
But for a body dropped, t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2h}{g}}\)
⇒ 2 = \(\sqrt{\frac{16}{g}}\) ⇒ g = \(\frac{16}{4}\) = 4m/s² on that planet
Time period of pendulum, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) = π
∴ 2\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) = 1 or \(\frac{l}{g}=\frac{1}{4}\) ⇒ l = \(\frac{g}{4}\)
Length of pendulum = \(\frac{4}{4}\) = 1m = 100cm on that planet

Question 13.
Show that the motion of a simple pendulum is simple harmonic and hence derive an equation for its time period.
Find the length of a simple pendulum which ticks seconds, (g = 9.8 ms-2) [AP Mar. ’18. ’16, ’15, May ’17, June ’15; TS Mar.’17, 15, May 17]
Solution:
Simple pendulum :
In a laboratory a heavy metallic bob is suspended from a rigid support with the help of a spunless thread. This arrangement is known as “simple pendulum”.

Let the length of simple pendulum is ‘l’ and the point of suspension is ‘S’. Let the pendulum is drawn to a side by a small angle ‘θ’ and allowed free to oscillate in the vertical plane. Then it will oscillate between the extreme positions A and B with a displacement say ‘x’ at any given time.

Let the bob is at one extreme position say B. The force vertically acting downwards is Weight W = mg.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 20

By resolving the weight into two per-pendicular components:

  1. The component mg sin θ is responsible for the to and fro motion of the bob.
  2. The component mg cos θ will balance the tension in the string.

Force useful for motion F = mg sin θ
= ma (From Newton’s 2nd Law)
∴ a = g sin θ
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 21

Since acceleration is proportional to displacement and acceleration is always directed towards a fixed point the motion of simple pendulum is “simple harmonic”.

Time period of simple pendulum :
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 22

Problem:
In simple pendulum T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) or l = \(\frac{gt^2}{4\pi^2}\)
For seconds pendulum T = 2s ⇒ t² = 4
∴ l = \(\sqrt{\frac{9.8\times4}{4\pi^2}}\) = 1 m (∴ π² nearly 9.8)

Question 14.
The period of a simple pendulum is found to increase by 50% when the length of the pendulum is increased by 0.6 m. Calculate the initial length and the initial period of oscillation at a place where g = 9.8 m/s².
Solution:
a) Increase in length of pendulum = 0.6m ;
Increase in time period = 50% = 1.5T
Let original length of pendulum = 1
Original time period = T; g = 9.8 m/s².
For 1st case 9.8 = π² \(\frac{1}{T^2}\) → 1 ;
For 2nd case l1 = (l + 0.6), T1 = 1.5 T
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 23
But l1 = l + 0.6 ;
∴ l + 0.6 = 2.25l ⇒ 0.6 = 1.25l
∴ Length of pendulum l = \(\frac{0.6}{1.25}\) = 0.48 m
b) Time period T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
= 2 × 3.142\(\sqrt{\frac{0.48}{9.8}}\) = 6.284 × 0.2213
= 1.391 sec.

Question 15.
A clock regulated by a seconds pendulum keeps correct time. During summer the length of the pendulum increases to 1.02m. How much will the clock gain or lose in one day?
Solution:
Time period of seconds pendulum,
T = 2 sec
Length of seconds pendulum,
L = gT² / 4π² = 0. 9927 m
Length of seconds pendulum during summer = 1.02 m
∴ Error in length, ∆l = 1.02 – 1 = 0.0273
In pendulum T × √l. From principles of error
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 24

Question 16.
The time period of a body suspended from a spring is T. What will be the new time period, if the spring is cut into two equal parts and (i) the mass is suspended from one part? (ii) the mass is suspended simultaneously from both the parts?
Solution:
Time period of spring, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{K}}\)
When a spring is cut into two equal parts force constant of each part K1 = 2K
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 25

ii) When mass is suspended simultaneously from two parts ⇒ they are connected in parallel. For springs in parallel Kp = K1 – K2 = 4K
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 26

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations

Question 16.
What is the length of a seconds pendulum on the earth? [AP Mar. ’17, ’16; June ’15; TS Mar. ’17]
Solution:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 8 Oscillations 27